高一必修1（模块1）句型必背(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)(（精选19篇））由网友“可乐无糖去冰”投稿提供，这次小编在这里给大家整理过的高一必修1（模块1）句型必背(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)，供大家阅读参考。
篇1：高一必修1（模块1）句型必背(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit1--5句型背诵
1) I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature.（强调句）
我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故，我变得对一切与大自然有关的事物都无比狂热。
2) It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face. （从句时态用完成时）
这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚。
3) Your friend, who doesn’t work hard, asks you to help him cheat in the end-of-term exam.（非限制性定语从句）
你的一个朋友叫你在期末考试中帮他作弊，这个朋友平常不认真学习。
4) I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven one evening in order to have a good look at the moon for once by myself.
有一天晚上，我熬到11点半故意不睡觉，为的是独自好好看看月亮一次。
5) If you have some trouble (in) getting along with your friends, you can write to the editor and ask for advice.
如果你在和朋友的相处上有问题，你可以写信给编辑向他征求建议。
6) Add up your score and see how many points you can get.
把你的得分加起来，看看得了多少。
7) What he did has added to our difficulties.
他的所作所为增加了我们的困难。
8) His income adds up to $1000 a month.
他每月的收入共计1000美元。
9) According to Anne, a true friend is a person whom you can trust and share your happiness and sorrow with.（定语从句）
安妮认为真正的朋友是一个你能信任、能与你共患难的人。
10) Why is she so concerned about his attitude to her work?
她为什么那么关注他对她的工作的看法？
11) The police asked him to set down what he had seen in a report.
警察让他在报告中写下他所看见的事情。
12) As I was about to go out and search for him, he happened to come in.
正当我打算出去找他时，他恰巧进来。
13) Mr. Jones lives alone and often feels lonely.
琼斯先生单独一人生活，常常感到孤独。
14) We tried to calm him down, but he kept crying.
我们试图让他平静下来，但他仍不停地哭着。
15) Does he dare (to) go out at night in such stormy weather?
他敢在这样一个暴风雨夜外出吗？
16) He would go through fire and water for his country.
他愿为国家赴汤蹈火。
17) That country suffered a heavy loss in the flood.
那个国家在水灾中遭受严重的损失。
18) World Englishes come from those countries where English plays an important role as a first or second language, either because of foreign rule or because of its special role as an international language.（定语从句）
世界英语来自那些以英语为第一或第二语言的国家，英语在这些国家起重要作用或是因为外国的统治，或是因为其作为国际语言的特殊地位。
19) All languages change when cultures communicate with one another.
当不同的语言互相沟通时，所有的语言都会发生变化。
20) Actually, the English spoken between about AD 450 and 1150 was based more on German than present day English.
实际上，从公元450年到1150年，人们所说的英语更多的是以德语为基础的，而现代英语不是。
21) Would you please come up to my flat for a visit?
请到我的公寓里来坐坐，好吗？
22) Believe it or not, he cheated in the exams.
信不信由你，他在考试中作弊。
23) Native English speakers can understand each other even if they don’t speak the same kind of English.
以英语作为母语的人，即使他们所讲的语言不尽相同，也可以互相交流。
24) Today the number of people learning English in China is larger than even before.
目前在中国学习英语的人数比以往任何时候都多。
25) It is the duty of a government to provide education for the children of its country. （it作形式主语）
政府的责任是为其国家的小孩提供教育。
26) Reading is one of the best ways of improving your vocabulary and usage.
阅读是帮助你改善词汇及其用法的最好方法之一。
27) Giving commands is less polite than making a request.
发号命令比发出请求粗鲁。
28) We asked her for directions and she told us to go round the corner on the left and keep going straight for two blocks.
我们向她问路，她告诉我们往左边拐弯后直走两个街区。
29) He knows several languages, such as English, French and German.
他懂几种语言，例如英语、法语和德语。
30) My sister and I have dreamed about cycling along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.
我姐姐和我一直梦想要沿湄公河从源头到终点骑车旅行。
31) The man insisted that he didn’t steal anything and he (should) be set free at once. (陈述语气、虚拟语气)
这男人坚持自己没有偷东西，他坚持说他应该立刻被释放。
32) She gave me a determined look – the kind that said she wouldn’t change her mind.
她给了我一个坚定的眼神--这种眼神表明她是不会改变主意的。
33) He is so stubborn that no one can persuade him to do anything.
他是如此的固执以致没有人能说服他做任何事。
34) My sister doesn’t care about details.
我的姐姐是不会考虑细节的。
35) She is a determined woman. Once she determines to do something, she will do it well.
她是个意志坚强的人。如果她下决心做什么事，就一定要做好。
36) He recorded the important events ad his afterthoughts in his travel journal.
在旅行日记中，他记下了重大的事件及自己的想法。
37) I am not familiar with this city, because this is my first visit.
我对这个城市不熟悉，因为这是我的第一次来访。
38) I don’t think it is necessary for us to give in.
我认为我们没有必要让步。
39) The topics of a travel journal can be different from a diary, often including people, things, and events less familiar to readers.
游记的主题可以和日记不同，经常包括那些读者不太熟悉的人和事。
40) It was great fun to put up tents here.
在这儿搭帐篷真好玩。
41) The number of people who were killed or injured in the earthquake reached more than 400,000.（定语从句）
死伤的人数达到40多万。
42) The army organized the rescue workers to dig out those who were trapped and to bury the dead. （定语从句）
部队组织救援人员将受困的人们挖出来，将死者掩埋。
43) All hope was not lost. = Not all hope was lost.（部分否定）
不是所有的希望都破灭了。
44) None of us were allowed to go there.（全部否定）
我们全都不许去那里。
45) He rescued the man from drowning.
他救了一男子使之免遭溺毙。
46) An earthquake left the whole city in ruins.
地震过后，全城到处是残垣断壁。
47) I feel highly honoured by your trust.
得到你的信任，我感到非常荣幸。
48) Professor Yu organized his thoughts before giving the speech.
于教授在演讲之前组织了一下思路。
49) Many people took shelter from the rain in the department store.
许多人在百货公司里避雨。
50) It seemed that the world was at an end as the earthquake destroyed nearly everything.
世界似乎到了末日，因为地震几乎毁了一切。
51) People began to wonder how long the disaster would last.
人们开始纳闷，这场灾难还会持续多久？
52) They used candles all the time instead of electricity.
他们一直用蜡烛，没有用电。
53) The one million people of the city, who thought little of these strange events, went to bed as usual that night.（非限制性定语从句）
这城市的一百万居民几乎都没有把这些奇怪的情况当一回事，当天晚上照常上床睡觉了。
54) We’d better prepare him for the bad news.
我们最好让他做好知道这个坏消息的心理准备。
55) The rubbish gave out a smelly gas.
垃圾发出一阵臭味。
56) I am getting in touch with him right away.
我马上跟他联系。
57) Are you willing to do public service work without pay?
你愿意无偿从事公益活动吗？
58) Do you easily lose heart when you are in trouble?
你处于不幸中时容易丧失信心吗？
59) The time when I first met him was a very difficult period of my life.
第一次见到他的时候是在我一生中非常艰难的时期。（定语从句）
60) It is a doctor’s job to advise patients on health problems.
医生的职责就是向病人提供有关健康的建议。
61) As a matter of fact, I was worried about whether I would be out of work.
事实上我担心我是不是会失业。
62) After getting up, he always drinks a glass of water, which he believes is good for his health. （非限制性定语从句）
每天起床后，他都喝一杯水，他认为这对他的身体有好处。
63) The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress, until today we have reached a stage where we have almost no rights at all. （定语从句）
过去30年来所出现的大量法律剥夺我们的权利，阻挡我们的进步，一直到今天，我们还处在几乎什么权利都没有的阶段。
64) In his life, he has always tried to help those who are less fortunate than himself. （定语从句）
在他的一生中，他总是设法帮助那些比他不幸的人。
65) Only then did we decide to answer violence with violence.（倒装句）
只有到这个时候我们才决定用暴力反抗暴力。
66) Only some of the children seemed to have understood it.
似乎只有一部分孩子明白。
67) The school where I studied only two years was three kilometers away.
那所我仅仅读了两年的学校有三公里远。（定语从句）
68) The parts of town where they lived were places decided by white people.（过去分词作后置定语）
他们在城里的住宅区都是由白人决定的。
69) Before he came to power, he was once put in prison for years.
在掌权之前，他曾经坐了几年牢。
70) This was my reward after working all my life for equal rights for the Blacks.
这是我毕生为争取黑人的平等权利而斗争所得到的回报。
71) He was sentenced to three years in prison for stealing.
他因偷窃被判处三年监禁。
72) He set up a black law firm to help those poor black people.
他开设了一间黑人律师事务所帮助那些穷苦的黑人。
73) In 1963, I helped him blow up some government buildings.
在1963年，我帮助他炸毁了一些政府大楼。
74) My family could not continue to pay my school fee.
我的家庭无法继续支付我的学费。
75) He taught us during the lunch breaks and the evenings when we should have been asleep.（虚拟语气）
在午餐的休息时间和晚上我们本应该睡觉的时候他教授我们。
篇2：人教新课标 高一必修1（模块1）句型必背
Unit1--5句型背诵
1) I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature.（强调句）
我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故，我变得对一切与大自然有关的事物都无比狂热。
2) It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face. （从句时态用完成时）
这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚。
3) Your friend, who doesn’t work hard, asks you to help him cheat in the end-of-term exam.（非限制性定语从句）
你的一个朋友叫你在期末考试中帮他作弊，这个朋友平常不认真学习。
4) I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven one evening in order to have a good look at the moon for once by myself.
有一天晚上，我熬到11点半故意不睡觉，为的是独自好好看看月亮一次。
5) If you have some trouble (in) getting along with your friends, you can write to the editor and ask for advice.
如果你在和朋友的相处上有问题，你可以写信给编辑向他征求建议。
6) Add up your score and see how many points you can get.
把你的得分加起来，看看得了多少。
7) What he did has added to our difficulties.
他的所作所为增加了我们的困难。
8) His income adds up to $1000 a month.
他每月的收入共计1000美元。
9) According to Anne, a true friend is a person whom you can trust and share your happiness and sorrow with.（定语从句）
安妮认为真正的朋友是一个你能信任、能与你共患难的人。
10) Why is she so concerned about his attitude to her work?
她为什么那么关注他对她的工作的看法？
11) The police asked him to set down what he had seen in a report.
警察让他在报告中写下他所看见的事情。
12) As I was about to go out and search for him, he happened to come in.
正当我打算出去找他时，他恰巧进来。
13) Mr. Jones lives alone and often feels lonely.
琼斯先生单独一人生活，常常感到孤独。
14) We tried to calm him down, but he kept crying.
我们试图让他平静下来，但他仍不停地哭着。
15) Does he dare (to) go out at night in such stormy weather?
他敢在这样一个暴风雨夜外出吗？
16) He would go through fire and water for his country.
他愿为国家赴汤蹈火。
17) That country suffered a heavy loss in the flood.
那个国家在水灾中遭受严重的损失。
18) World Englishes come from those countries where English plays an important role as a first or second language, either because of foreign rule or because of its special role as an international language.（定语从句）
世界英语来自那些以英语为第一或第二语言的国家，英语在这些国家起重要作用或是因为外国的统治，或是因为其作为国际语言的特殊地位。
19) All languages change when cultures communicate with one another.
当不同的语言互相沟通时，所有的语言都会发生变化。
20) Actually, the English spoken between about AD 450 and 1150 was based more on German than present day English.
实际上，从公元450年到1150年，人们所说的英语更多的是以德语为基础的，而现代英语不是。
21) Would you please come up to my flat for a visit?
请到我的公寓里来坐坐，好吗？
22) Believe it or not, he cheated in the exams.
信不信由你，他在考试中作弊。
23) Native English speakers can understand each other even if they don’t speak the same kind of English.
以英语作为母语的人，即使他们所讲的语言不尽相同，也可以互相交流。
24) Today the number of people learning English in China is larger than even before.
目前在中国学习英语的人数比以往任何时候都多。
25) It is the duty of a government to provide education for the children of its country. （it作形式主语）
政府的责任是为其国家的小孩提供教育。
26) Reading is one of the best ways of improving your vocabulary and usage.
阅读是帮助你改善词汇及其用法的最好方法之一。
27) Giving commands is less polite than making a request.
发号命令比发出请求粗鲁。
28) We asked her for directions and she told us to go round the corner on the left and keep going straight for two blocks.
我们向她问路，她告诉我们往左边拐弯后直走两个街区。
29) He knows several languages, such as English, French and German.
他懂几种语言，例如英语、法语和德语。
30) My sister and I have dreamed about cycling along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.
我姐姐和我一直梦想要沿湄公河从源头到终点骑车旅行。
31) The man insisted that he didn’t steal anything and he (should) be set free at once. (陈述语气、虚拟语气)
这男人坚持自己没有偷东西，他坚持说他应该立刻被释放。
32) She gave me a determined look – the kind that said she wouldn’t change her mind.
她给了我一个坚定的眼神--这种眼神表明她是不会改变主意的。
33) He is so stubborn that no one can persuade him to do anything.
他是如此的固执以致没有人能说服他做任何事。
34) My sister doesn’t care about details.
我的姐姐是不会考虑细节的。
35) She is a determined woman. Once she determines to do something, she will do it well.
她是个意志坚强的人。如果她下决心做什么事，就一定要做好。
36) He recorded the important events ad his afterthoughts in his travel journal.
在旅行日记中，他记下了重大的事件及自己的想法。
37) I am not familiar with this city, because this is my first visit.
我对这个城市不熟悉，因为这是我的第一次来访。
38) I don’t think it is necessary for us to give in.
我认为我们没有必要让步。
39) The topics of a travel journal can be different from a diary, often including people, things, and events less familiar to readers.
游记的主题可以和日记不同，经常包括那些读者不太熟悉的人和事。
40) It was great fun to put up tents here.
在这儿搭帐篷真好玩。
41) The number of people who were killed or injured in the earthquake reached more than 400,000.（定语从句）
死伤的人数达到40多万。
42) The army organized the rescue workers to dig out those who were trapped and to bury the dead. （定语从句）
部队组织救援人员将受困的人们挖出来，将死者掩埋。
43) All hope was not lost. = Not all hope was lost.（部分否定）
不是所有的希望都破灭了。
44) None of us were allowed to go there.（全部否定）
我们全都不许去那里。
45) He rescued the man from drowning.
他救了一男子使之免遭溺毙。
46) An earthquake left the whole city in ruins.
地震过后，全城到处是残垣断壁。
47) I feel highly honoured by your trust.
得到你的信任，我感到非常荣幸。
48) Professor Yu organized his thoughts before giving the speech.
于教授在演讲之前组织了一下思路。
49) Many people took shelter from the rain in the department store.
许多人在百货公司里避雨。
50) It seemed that the world was at an end as the earthquake destroyed nearly everything.
世界似乎到了末日，因为地震几乎毁了一切。
51) People began to wonder how long the disaster would last.
人们开始纳闷，这场灾难还会持续多久？
52) They used candles all the time instead of electricity.
他们一直用蜡烛，没有用电。
53) The o
篇3：高一必修1 Unit 3 Travel journal教学设计(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit 3 Travel journal
Designed by Xu Jianying, Ying Huihong, Zhao Lili Wu Xianfen, Jiang Jinling
I．Teaching aims and demands:
1.Skill goals:
Describe a journey.
Revise means of transportation.
The Present Progressive Tense expresses futurity.
Keep a travel journal to show personal impressions.
2.Function sentence patterns---Good wishes and farewells
Have a nice/ good time. Have a nice/good time.
Tare care. Good luck on your journey.
Say “ hello” to … Write to me.
Give my love / best wishes to … Have fun.
3.Vocabulary:
journal, fare, transport, finally, cycle, persuade, stubborn, insist, proper(ly), determine(d), altitude, valley, attitude, shorts, camp, record, topic, familiar, brave, give in, change one’s mind.
detail, atlas, glacier, rapids, waterfall, plain, delta, canyon, afterthought.
Vientiane, Laos, Phnom Penh, Cambodia, Ho Chi Minh, Vietnam, Mekong, Tibetan.
4.Grammar:
The Present Continuous Tense to express future actions.
II.The analysis of the teaching material:
1. Warming-up and listening: Let students know that travel is very common in modern society. Ask them to discuss the fares to get to one place for different kinds of transport. Do some listening practice
2. Pre-reading and reading: The word has many great rivers. One of them is the Mekong. Introduce a travel journal---Journey down the Mekong to students.
3.Learning about language: In this part, students will discover useful words and expressions and also learn useful structures---- the Present Continuous Tense to express future actions
5.Using language: Present how to write a travel journal and then practise writing
III.Teaching arrangment
1st Period warming-up and listening
2nd Period Reading
3rd Period learn about language
4th Period Using language
The First Period warming-up and listening
Teaching aims
1. To talk about things related to travel, e.g. the place the fares and transport, etc.
2. To improve the Ss’ listening ability.
Teaching important points
1. To talk about travel.
2. To tell the Ss how to catch the key points when they do listening.
Emotion goals:
There are so many beautiful places in China and the whole world. We should love our country, love the whole world and love nature.
Teaching aids
a tape recorder, a projector and a computer
Step 1. A song (歌词见后面)
Step 2 Warming up
Show the photos of some beautiful places on the PowerPoint. （The Great Wall; Yuanming Yuan ; Budala Palace; Venice; The Liberty Statue in New York,America; Fujiyama.）Ask students whether they know where they are.
Then T ask: Do you like traveling? Ss: Yes
T: Why do you like traveling? (超级链接)：Enjoy beautiful scenery; Increase our knowledge; Make friends; Be good to health… Ss may have a lot of different ideas. Give them time to talk freely.
T ask: How will you prepare for traveling? (including the time, the place, the means, the cost, the things you’ll take along, … of traveling) (超级链接) :
1. time (超级链接): the Spring Festival; National Day; May Day; weekend;
summer( winter) vacation…
2.destination(超级链接): Enjoy some beautiful pictures of famous places with the whole class: Huangshan黄山; Jiuzhaigou九寨沟; Guilin桂林; Stone Forest
(石林); Jiuquxi(九曲溪; Yunufeng,wuyi(武夷玉女峰); Sanqing Mountain三清山;
Hangzhou; Longmen Caves (龙门石窟); Tian’anmen Square(天安门广场); Terracotta,Xi’an(西安兵马俑); Summer Palace(颐和园); London Bridge;
The Opera House悉尼歌剧院; Eiffel Tower艾菲尔铁塔.
3.What to do(超级链接): Rock climbing; rafting; bengee; skiing; hiking
Allow the Ss to talk more about it.
4.travel cost: talk with the Ss quickly.
5.things to take(超级链接): ID cards(身份证) passports; money (cash); a book of maps; 等。
6.means of transportation(超级链接): on foot; by bike; by bus; by car; by plane/by air; by boat/by ship/by sea
7. background information(超级链接): history; customs; culture; language; religion; politics; weather; …
8. Points for attention(超级链接): Don’t throw away waste; Don’t park your bike or car in the wrong parking lot; Don’t make a fire freely; Don’t feed animal; Protect animals and plants; Do as the guide tells you do; ….
Step 3 Speaking
T: Now, imagine that you live in Qinghai Province. You plan to spend a holiday with a friend somewhere in Southeast Asia. Choose three places to visit and find out the one –way fare to get there for different kinds of transport. Then, make up a dialogue In pairs, discuss the fares and decide where to go.
Before they do that task, show a map of Southeast Asia with detailed position of
Laos; Vietnam; Ho Chi Minh City; Phnom Penh; Thailand; Cambodia; Singapore; Malaysia.
Then show some pictures of the sceneries in these countries. Then give the Ss several minutes to prepare for the dialogue and then call some of them to act their dialogues out.
Step 4 Listening
1.Listen to Part 3 CHATTING WITH A GIRL and tick the words .
2. Listen again to the tape and fill in the chart
3.Listen to Part 4 of JOURNAL DOWN THE MEKONG and tick the words you hear on the tape.
4.Listen to this material again and answer the questions.
(1)Who is telling the story? Wang Kun
(2)When did Wang Wei meet her cousins? In October in Dali
(3)Why didn’t they begin the journey in Tibet with Wang Wei and Wang Kun?
The story doesn’t say
(4)Find a word that describe how the person telling the story feels about travelling in Laos. Afraid,alone,excited,glad…
5.Listen to Part 5. Wang Kun is describing a few of the things they saw during their tour. Pick out the correct in formation and then tell about their experience in Laos.
(1) In the village the cyclists saw ____B___.
A. electric lights B. candle lights C. kerosene lights
(2)After lunch they went to Vientiane ,the capital city of Laos by B.
A. bike B. bus C. truck
(3)They greeted an old man by ____A____.
A. putting their hands together B. moving their heads C. waving their arms.
(4) In Vientiane, they saw _____C_____
A. trucks, buses and bicycles B. cars, motorbikes and buses
C. trucks, buses, jeeps and motorbikes
(5) The Mekong River is very rich in ____C__.
A. gold B. pears C. fish
Step 5 Homework
Make up a dialogue .
P57. Using structures
P59. Reading task
The Second Period Reading
Teaching goals
1. Learn something about the Mekong River through reading.
2. Students can use what they have learned to describe a trip.
3. Students should realize if they want to be successful, what personalities they should have.
Teaching important and difficult points:
1. Understand the text well.
2. Try to master the useful new words & expressions in this period.
Teaching aids: a computer & a projector
Teaching procedures
Step Ⅰ Warming Up
T: Do you like travelling?
Present some pictures of beautiful places to arouse their interest of travelling. Meanwhile, the teacher can also ask some more questions to make the students say something about their journey , such as their plans of trips, the difficulties they met in their journey and so on.
Step Ⅱ Lead In
T: Q1: Have you visited any river? Q2: How many great rivers do you know?
Q3 : If you could travel down only one of them, which one would you choose? Why?
Ask the students the locations of some famous rivers in the world .(Mekong, Rhein, Seine, Nile, Thames, Congo, Amazon, Mississippi, Volg)
Step Ⅲ Pre-reading
T: Have you visited the Mekong River? If no, let’s learn something about it.
1. Show a picture of the Mekong River and the brief introduction of it. Ask them:
Can you list the countries that the Mekong River flows through?
3. Enjoy the beautiful sights along the Mekong River to arouse their interest of it.
Step IV Reading
In this step, get the students to read the text and finish some tasks.
Task1: Scan the text quickly, then answer some questions
Q1. Who are Wang kun and Wang Wei?
Q2.What are their dreams?
Q3.Who are Dao Wei and Yu Hang?
Q4. Is it a difficult journey to cycle along the Mekong? Why?
Q5.What can you see when you travel along the Mekong River?
Task2: Listen to the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation, then do the T or F exercise.
1.Wang kun is a high school student.
2.Both Dao Wei and Yu Hang are Dai and they grew up in eastern Yunnan province
3.The source of Mekong is in Qinghai province .
4.Finally Wang Kun agreed with his sister to cycle with her.
5.They found few atlas and books about Mekong River in library. 6. Mekong river begins at glacier on a Tibet mountain. the water there is clear but not cold.
7. Only a small part of the river is in China.
8.As it enters Southeast Asia, it moves slowly.
Task3: Careful reading
Read the text again and try to complete a form.
their dream
Their journey
Their preparation
Task4: Consolidation
Fill in the blanks
Mekong River begins ___ a glacier on a Tibetan mountain. At first ,The river is small and the water begins to move_______. It becomes ______as it passes ______ deep valleys. Traveling ______western Yunnan Province. Sometimes The River ______ wide Valley and becomes a_________. We were both surprised to learn that half of the river is in China . After it leaves china and the high altitudes, the Mekong becomes _____ , brown and warm. As it enters Southeast Asia, it travels slowly _________hills and low valleys, and the _____ where rice grows. at last the river’s delta enters the South China Sea.
Step V Post-reading
Task1: Make comparison
An attitude is what a person thinks about something. Make lists of Wang Wei’s and Wang Kun’s similar and different attitudes about the trip.
Task2: Debate
Which character do you like,Wang Kun or Wang wei? Why?
Task3: Understand two mottos
Life is just a series of trying to make up your mind.
Success belongs to the persevering
Step VI Homework
1． Read the text again.
2． Write a passage about their journey.
The Third Period Learning about language
Teaching goals
1.To revise the useful words and expressions.
2. To learn useful structures--- the Present Continuous Tense to express future actions.
Teaching important points
the Present Continuous Tense to express future actions.
Teaching difficult points
How to use the Present Continuous Tense to express a plan or something to be done according to plan..
Teaching aids
a projector and a computer
Step 1:Greeting ： A song.
Step 2:Practice
一、Use the reading passage to find the correct word or expression for each of the following sentences.
1.He is so stubborn that no one can ____________ him to do anything.
2.A ___________ person always tries to finish the job, no matter how hard it is.
3._______ she has made up her mind, nothing will ___________________.
4.Is it_______ for us to take off our hats in church?
5.He ________ that we find the source of the trouble as soon as possible. Everyone agreed.
6.Do you remember every _____ of the story you have just read.
7.I wanted to pay the train ____ , but my friend insisted. _______I gave in.
8.She persuaded all of us to _______ to work instead of taking the bus。
Answer: 1. persuade 2. determined 3. Once; change her mind
4. proper 5. insisted 6. detail 7 fare; Finally 8. cycle
二、Match the words and the meanings
valley a high place from which a river suddenly goes down.
plain a fast-moving part of a river.
waterfall a long, low, wide place between hills.
delta the long place where a river enters the sea
rapids a large body of ice moving slowly down a high valley
canyon a large flat place
glacier a deep, very wide valley, usually with a river
超级链接: some pictures of all these words to help Ss understand the meaning of the words more clearly.
三、Complete this passage with some of the above words.
I really enjoyed my school field trip in geography. We saw so many beautiful things: a _________ that flowed like a river of ice through a _______ that cut the mountains into two parts. We also discovered a river which fell off the mountains and become a wonderful __________this was even more exciting to see than the _______ where the water seemed to boil. Later we followed the river to a quieter ______ and finally into a ______ and the sea.
Answer: glacier valley waterfall rapids canyon delta
STEP 3 : Grammar
Enjoy a song to present the Present Continuous Tense:
I'm babysitting on Thursday
Would you like to go out on Monday?
No, sorry, I can’t
Why not?
I’m babysitting on Monday.
Would you like to go out on Tuesday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m doing my laundry on Tuesday.
Would you like to go out on Wednesday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m working overtime on Wednesday.
Would you like to go out on Thursday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m working out on Thursday.
Would you like to go out on Friday?
No, sorry, I can’t.
Why not?
I’m visiting relatives on Friday.
Would you like to go out on the weekend?
Well… maybe!
Ask the Ss to answer: What is she doing on Monday/Tuesday…?
The Present Continuous Tense for future use
The present continuous tense can be used to express a plan or an arrangement.
现在进行时可用来表示一个在最近按计划或打算要进行的动作；通常带一个表将来的时间状语, 但有明确的上下文时无须指出时间。
能用进行时表将来的动词：
go, come, leave, start, arrive, give, return, sleep ,stay, play, do, take, get, see off, travel, fly, drive, walk, reach, meet…
Step4: Practice
1. Look at the following dialogue and underline the verbs in this tense.
A: Are you working this evening?
B: No. We’re having an English party, don’t you know?
A: Yes, I do. And we’re giving some performance at the party. What are you going to do?
B: I’m singing song with my classmates.
2. In the following dialogue, a newspaper reporter is interviewing Wang Wei about her plans for the trip along the Mekong River. However, they are not sure about some of the verb tenses. Please help them complete their conversation.
R: Miss Wang. I hear that you _____________ along the Mekong
River. That’s really exciting. Have you got everything ready?
W: Almost.
R:When are you _________ ?
W:Next Monday.
R: How far are you _______ each day?
W:It’s hard to say. If the weather is fine, I think we’ll be able to ride 75km a day.
R:Where are __________ at night?
W: Usually in our tent, but sometimes in a small hotel in town.
R: Do you think you are ______ back here soon?
W:Oh, we __________ back to this place.
We __________ home. That’ll be a month later.
R:Thank you for your time, Miss Wang. Good luck on your journey!
W:Thank you!
Answer: are going to cycle ; leaving; cycling; you staying; coming; aren’t coming; are returning
3. Multiple choice:
1.--I’m going to the states.
-- How long ____ you _______ in the States?
A. are ; stayed B. are ; staying C. have ; stayed D. did ; stay
2.--Will you tell us something about the weather there?
--I ________ to that.
A. go B. come C. am going D. am coming
3.-When are you leaving?
--The plane ________ at 11:05.
A. takes off B. took off C. will take off D. taking off
4.-I believe if we _________ abroad, most probably we will go by CAAC.
A. have been B. are going C. had been D. were going
5.-I’m going to Shanghai for a few weeks.
--_______________.
A. Good-bye B. So long C. Have a good time. D.I like it
6. A new play _____ at the theatre this week. Would you like to see it?
A. has been put on B. has put on C. is being put on D. will put on
7.-Where are you going for your holidays?
-_________.
A. What a good idea B. I’m going to Spain on business
C. I won’t have to go D. I haven’t made up my mind yet
8.-I’ll go camping this weekend.
--_____________.
A. Don’t give up now B. No, I’m too busyC. Have a good time D. Can you fish?
9.I’ve won a holiday for two to Florida. I ____ my mum.
A. am taking B. have taken C. take D. will have taken
Answer: 1.B 2.C 3.A 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. B 8. C 9. A
Step5: DIALOGUE
1. First show an example: Where you going on holiday?
A: Yanzi, where you going on holiday? B: I’ m going to Laos.
A: When are you leaving? B: Next Sunday.
A: How are you going to Laos? B: I’m taking a plane.
A: How long are you staying there? B: About two weeks.
A: Great. Have a good trip. B: Thanks.
Farewells:
Have a good trip/ journey; Have a good day/ time;
Enjoy yourself; Best wishes; Have fun; Good luck; Take care!
2. A game:
Divide the class into two groups with one leader. Each group will need one coin and a counter.
Procedure: 1. Show the Ss the board game.
2. Demonstrate the task: toss a coin and explain that one side of the coin means move two spaces, the other means move one space. Move your counter onto a square and speak for thirty seconds on the subjects of the square.
Encourage questions.
Step6:HOMEWORK
1.Do exercises on Page 56, 57
2.Review The Present Continuous Tense ,then do exercises on Page57,58
Period 4 Using Language
Teaching goals:
1). To read the passage A NIGHT IN THE MOUNTAINS
2). To use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing. Teaching important and difficult points:
1).Improve the students’ writing ability.
2).Enable the students to understand the passage better.
Step 1 Lead-in
1. Enjoy the music “青藏高原”
2. Appreciate the beauty of Tibet.
3. Ask students several questions about the pictures, e.g.
What do you think of these pictures?
What’s the weather like there?
Do you want to go there? etc.
4. Talking about Tibet.
Have you ever been to Tibet? Do you want to travel in Tibet? Can you tell me something about Tibet?
Tibet lies on the Qinghai-Tibet Plateau of the southwest border of China. The average height of the whole region is more than 4,000 meters above sea level, for which Tibet is known as “Roof of the World”. The highest peak of Tibet, also the highest in Himalayas and in the whole world, is Everest Peak, which is as high as 8,846.27 meters above sea level.
Although a part of China, Tibet has a unique culture of all its own. It is mainly inhabited by Tibetans, a minority nationality of old and mysterious people. Tourist attractions include the Potala Palace in Lhasa, Jokhang Temple, and a number of Buddhist sacred places.
Tibet (Xi Zang in Chinese) is to the south of Xin Jiang Uygur Autonomous Region and Qing Hai Province, to the west of Sichuan, to the northwest of Yunnan and to the north of India and Nepal. Its population of 2.3 million people come from a variety of ethnic groups including Tibetan, Han, Monba and Lhota. Its capital city is Lhasa. Northwest Tibet, mainly Qing Hai plateau, is home to a variety of unusual and unique animals. Across the northern expanse of Tibet, you can see vast grasslands where horses, yak and sheep roam freely. The world's lowest valley, the Grand Yarlun-tzanpo River Valley lies in east Tibet. It is freezing cold in most time of the year. Most tourists come to visit Tibet only in the warmest seasons, June, July, August and early September.
Step 2 Reading
We know Wang Wei and Wang Kun have traveled down the Mekong. Today they have reached the Tibetan Mountains. They will stay there for a night. Now let’s look at the passage “A night in the mountains” on page 22. Read it quickly to find the main idea. Show some questions.
1.How does Wang Kun feel about the trip now?
2.What do you think has changed his attitude?
3.Is it natural for Wang Kun not to feel lonely?
4.Would you feel the same way in this situation? Why or Why not?
Step 3 Listen and mark
Let the students listen to the recorder and mark the rising and falling tone of each sense group and sentence. Then practice reading aloud. Pay attention to pronunciation and intonation.
Step 4 Dialogue
Suppose Wang Wei and Wang Kun leave their camp the next morning and go on with the journey. Make a short dialogue between them.
Sample dialogue :
--Oh , up so early?
--Early? It’s nearly 9 o’clock.
--Oops! (Look at his watch). I guess you’re right.
--Why were you so tired?
--Well, I stayed up late last night to watch the stars.
--That’s nice. They must be pretty.
--Yes, they are.
Then ask students to make up their own dialogues. They may discuss and practice in pairs.
Step 5 Guided writing
1.reading
In this unit, we have read the first two parts of a travel journal and have listened to the third part of the travel journal. What is the difference between a journal and a diary? Let’s read the passage on page 23 and find out the difference between the two.
A diary
A travel journal
2 Writing a letter
Now let’s do a writing practice. Imagine that you are a friend of Wang Wei. Write a short letter to her and ask her to describe: how she feels, what she is doing, and some place you want to know about. Then wish her well on her journey by using at least two of these expressions:
Have a nice/good time. Have a nice/good trip. Take care.
Good luck on your journey. Say “Hello” to …. Write to me.
Give my best/love wishes to …. Have fun.
Tell the students that they can refer to the following steps.
In pairs. Choose the details from the journey that are most interesting. Think of what else you would like to know about the journey. Write these ideas down as questions.
Now choose two or three of the best questions for your letter. Each question should have another sentence explaining why you want to know this information.
Put them in an order that makes sense.
Begin your letter as shown in the textbook and add your questions for Wang Wei.
Finish your letter as shown in the textbook.
A sample writing:
Hi, brave little Wei,
How I worry about you and Wang Kun! Do you have a good time now? I hope so. What are you doing now? Are you still in Laos? Can you tell me something about people’s life there? When are you leaving for Cambodia? When you get there, tell me about the Buddhist temples there. Please send some photos with your next letter! Well, Have a good trip and don’t forget to write to me! Give my best wishes to Wang Kun. Good luck on your journey.
Take care!
Yours,
Wang Lin
Step 6 Homework
1. Finish writing the letter
2. Review the whole unit
3. Read the passage in workbook( page 59) “The end of our journey ”.
Language points
1. one-way fare / single-way fare (单程票价), round-way fare (往返/双程票价)
2. different kinds of transport (Br.E) / transportation(Am.E)
3. journey down the Mekong 湄公河之旅
有 “沿着”之意,相当于 “along”,
1) 由北向南,由西向东用down, 反之用up;
2) 由城镇向农村时用down, 反之用up;
3) 依门牌号码,由大数字向小数字行进时,应用down ,反之用up;
4) 由上而下,如:沿着山坡而下,沿着江河顺流而下,从楼上到楼下由住宅到街上，应用down,
反之用up
Para.1: 4. dream of / about doing 梦想，梦见（后接名词，代词，动名词）
e.g. What a small world! I wouldn’t dream of meeting you here.
The young soldier sometimes dreams of his hometown.
dream n. have/dream a dream, realize a dream
5. take a bike trip *
6. get a chance to do *
7. finally, adv. 最后，终于final adj. 最后的，n （常用复数）决赛，期末考试
e.g. We waited and waited, and the train finally arrived.
What is the final score of the table tennis single for men?
How are you prepared for your finals?
8. cycle along *
9. go for bike rides *
10. in the countryside *
11. persuade sb (not) to do, 说服某人（不）做…
persuade sb that + clause 使某人相信
Then she persuaded me to buy one.=Then she succeeded in asking me to buy one.
e.g. The salesman persuaded us to buy his product.
He tried to persuade me that he was honest.
persuade sb to do sth 指成功地说服,
“说而不服, 或说而无果”应用 advise sb to do sth / try to persuade sb to do
12. at the college/ university *
13. get / make sb interested in = interest sb, show interest in sth/ sb
get+ n./pron.+adj.=make + n./pron.+adj.
e.g. They didn’t get home after school as usual, which got/ made mother worried.
Para.2: 14. Although she didn’t know the best way of… although “虽然,但是”,引导让步状语从句,不与but连用
though一般可与although互用，引导的让步状语从句有时用倒装语序.作副词时, “然而,可是”,通常放于句尾,并用逗号与句子隔开
e.g. Young though he is, he is very rich.
He said he would come; he didn’t, though.
15. a way of doing/ to do *
e.g. She didn’t know the best way of getting to places.= She didn’t know the best way to get to places.
16. insist (若insist后面宾语从句的主语与主句的主语不一致,谓语由加动词原形构成,
其中should可省略)
insist that sb (should)do 坚持认为，坚持说
insist on/upon sth/ doing 坚持做，坚决做
e.g. We insisted that father (should) give up smoking.
She insisted on/upon going to Beijing by air.
17. care about, care for, care to do
care about关心,忧虑 care for喜欢,照顾 care to do愿意/同意做某事
e.g. I don’t care (about) what happens to him.
Would you care for a drink?
Would you care to go for a walk?
18. give sb a determined look, determined坚定的,坚决的
e.g. They were determined to drive the enemy away from their country.=They determined to drive…
determine to do= make up one’s mind to do, decide to do
19. change one’s mind, mind此处解“意见，想法”，[C]
make up one’s mind 下定决心,拿好主意
e.g. Once he has made up his mind, nothing can be done to change his mind.
20. at a altitude of…* 在海拔…米处 at a altitude of 10,000 feet
21. be excited about *
22. breathe the air, take a breath
23. experience [U] “经验，感受” have experience in/at doing
[C]“经历，体验”
e.g. I’d prefer a lady with rich experience in/ at looking after babies.
His experiences in Africa are interesting.
24. give in 屈服，投降，让步 give in to sb 向某人让步，屈服于某人
give up 放弃 give up doing/sth
e.g. The mother gave in and bought a toy for her child.
Don’t give up. You still have chances to win in the match.
Para.3: 25. pass through through指从两边穿过或穿过空间内部, across指从一定范围的一边到另一边 “横跨”表面
26. be surprised to do *
Sentence focus:
1. It was my sister who first had the idea…
强调句型：It is / was+被强调部分+ that/ who+其余部分
注意：强调句中it不能更换，is/was与“其余部分”的时态一致，数不受被强调部分单复数的影响，被强调部分可以是除谓语以外的任何成分，被强调部分是人可用that/who，其它一律用that.被强调若是原句的主语，who/that之后的谓语动词在人称和数上与该主语一致。
e.g. I saw John in the street this morning.
---- It was I who/that saw John in the street this morning. （强调主语）
---- It was John that/ whom I saw in the street this morning. （强调宾语）
---- It was in the street that I saw John this morning. （强调地点状语）
---- It was this morning that I I saw John in the street. （强调时间状语）
2. She gave me a determined look---the kind that said…, the kind=the kind of look
the kind是a look的同位语,后面是that引导的定语从句, 其中say指 “指明,表明”
e.g The clock on the wall said a quarter to ten.
3. Once she has made up her mind, nothing can change it.=When she has made up hermind, nothing can change it.
once conj.一旦……(就), 一经……便……,相当于as soon as
e.g. Once you understand the rule, you will have no difficulty.
Translation: 钱一旦用完，我们该怎么办?
What will we do once the money is gone/ used up?
一旦做了，就要把事情做得最好.
Once you do it, you should do it best.
4. It becomes rapids as it passes through deep valleys, traveling across…traveling 是现在分词作伴随状语.
e.g. They came to the street, looking for the lost dog.
附：歌词
Kokomo
Aruba Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
Bermuda Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo Montego baby why don't we go Jamaica
Off the Florida Keys
There's a place called Kokomo
That's where you wanna go to get away from it all
Bodies in the sand
Tropical drink melting in your hand
We'll be falling in love
To the rhythm of a steel drum band
Down in Kokomo
Aruba Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
We'll get there fast
And then we'll take it slow
That's where we wanna go
Way down to Kokomo
To Martinique, that Monserrat mystique
We'll put out to sea
And we'll perfect our chemistry
By and by we'll defy a little bit of gravity
Afternoon delight
Cocktails and moonlit nights
That dreamy look in your eye
Give me a tropical contact high
Way down in Kokomo
Aruba, Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda, Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
We'll get there fast
And then we'll take it slow
That's where we wanna go
Way down to Kokomo
Port Au Prince I wanna catch a glimpse
Everybody knows
A little place like Kokomo
Now if you wanna go
And get away from it all
Go down to Kokomo
Aruba, Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda, Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
We'll get there fast
And then we'll take it slow
That's where we wanna go
Way down to Kokomo
Aruba, Jamaica ooo I wanna take you
To Bermuda, Bahama come on pretty mama
Key Largo, Montego baby why don't we go
Ooo I wanna take you down to Kokomo
篇4：新课标必修1 unit 1 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit 1 Friendship
Part one useful words
1. add
1) 增加，附加
2) 加，加起来
3) 补充说，又说
【典型例句】
1） Add more hot water , please.
2） If you add 4 to 3 you get 7
3） I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.
4） These numbers add up to 100.
【类比延伸】
1）n. addition 增加，附加物
2) n. adder 加法器
【拓展】
1) add to = increase
2) add … to.. 把。。。加到。。
3) add up 加起来
4) add up to 总计达， 加起来总和是。。。
例如：
The bad weather only add to our difficult.
He wrote down the weight of each stone and then added up all the weights.
【过关练习】
1) there have been several new events _______ to the program for the Beijing Olympic Games. ( 北京)
A. add B. too add
C. adding D. added
2) The heavy snow _____ our difficulty with the project.
A. added up to B. added
C. added up D. added to
3) Please ______ the numbers and I’m sure they will ______ more than 1000.
A. add up ; add B. add up ; add up
C. add up; add up to D. add; add up
2. ignore
1）不理睬，忽视；
2） ＝take notice of 强调装不知道或没有看到
【典型例句】
1） I tried to tell her but she ignored me.
2） Ignore the child if he misbehaves, and he’ll soon stop.
【拓展】
1） adj. ignorant （常和of, in 连用） 无知识的， 不知道的。 强调“不懂，不知”
He is ignorant of Latin
2) n. ignorance 无知愚昧
ignorance of the law is no excuse 不懂法律不能成为借口
【过关练习】
1） ― My children are always arguing.
--- ____________.
A. Just ignore them B. That’s right
C. Are you sure D. How old is the boy
* 用ignore的适当形式填空
2）He ________ the doctor’s advice and goes on smoking.
3) I was ______ that the boss could be so strict.
4) his failure resulted from his ______________.
3．cheat
1). V (常和into , of 连用)骗取，欺诈，作弊；逃脱，免于
2) 骗子（尤其是游戏或比赛中的）作弊者； 欺骗手段
【典型例句】
1） George cheated me but I’ll get even with him one day!
2） He always cheats at chards ; I never play with him.
3） He didn’t play the game fairly --- he cheated.
4） The swimmers cheated death in spite of the storm.
【拓展】
cheat sb. . of sth.
demand sb. . of sth.
cure sb. . of sth.
rob sb. . of sth.
fool sb. . of sth.
inform sb. . of sth.
warn sb. of sth.
accuse sb. of sth.
【过关练习】
1) Any who is caught ___ shall not pass the exam.
A. to cheat B. cheating
C. to be cheating D. cheated
2) All her money was ____ on her way home
A. cheated B. robbed C. stolen D. lose
* 完成句子
3） 这家银行昨晚被抢劫了很多现金。
The bank _______ _______ ________ a lot pof money last night.
4) 这个贼从这家商店偷了很多昂贵的画。
The thief ______ many expensive pictures ______ the shop.
5.) 他因拒捕而受到控告。
He was ______ ______ resisting arrest.
6) 请通知学生们演讲的日前。
Please _______ the students ______ the date of speech.
7)医生们成功地救治了他的非典疾病。
The doctors _______ him ______ his SARS successfully.
4. reason
1) n.原因， 理由， 动机
2）n. 理智，道理。判断力
【典型例句】
1) The reason why she was ill was that she had eaten bad meat.
2) The reason for this is that this plane is also a bicycle.
3) There are reasons for this great interest in the ideas, feelings, and action of youth.
对年轻人的思想情感和行动发生这样巨大的兴趣，自有它的道理。
3） There’s a great deal of reason in his advice.
【过关练习】
1） The reason _____ he was late was _____ his car had broken down on the way.
A. why; because B. that; because
C. that; for D. why; that
2) This is the very reason _____ he explained to me just now.
A. why B. that C. for which D. of
3) He didn’t turn up at the party ______ some reason.
A. for B. because C. because of D. on
4) His failure was ______ his laziness.
A. because B. because of C. as a result D. the reason for
【拓展】
adj. reasonable ①合理的 ； 通情达理的；
You must really be reasonable, and prepared to cooperate.
② 适当的；不高的（价钱）
Ten pounds for a good dictionary seems reasonable enough.
【类比延伸】
1） reason 决定做一件事或采取某种行动的理由； 解释或原谅某个行为的理由。
2） cause 产生某事结果的起因，动机，理由
3） excuse 托词，借口； 指为某行为而作的解释，可能是真的，也可是藉口
【过关练习】
用reason, cause, excuse, reasonable填空
5) what he said at the meeting was very _______ and nobody was against him
6) You shouldn’t find any ____ for your laziness.
7) Who knows the ___ for his being late?
8) The police had found out the ______ of the big fire in the centre of the city.
5. share
1） n. (属于或由某人做的)部分， 一份， 股份，股票
2）v. （常与in连用） 共用， 分摊，共有
【典型例句】
1) We gave each of the five children an equal share.
2) they sell share in companies at the stock exchange.
3) they shared the sweets
4) they share their joys and sorrows
【拓展】
1) share sth. with sb. 与某人共用某物
2) bear / take one’s share of 负担。。。的部分
【过关联系】
1） Let Harry play with your toys as well, Clare, you must learn to ______ (全国)
A. support B. care C. spare D. share
2) It rained heavily. And it was very kind of him to ____ his umbrella with me.
A. use B. share C. take D. bring
Part Two Phrase
1. be concerned about
对。。。关心，挂念， 关注某事
【典型例句】
1) The government should be concerned about unemployment.
2) we are rather concerned about father’s health.
【拓展】
concern oneself with /in … 从事/参与某事
concern oneself about / for… 担忧/关心。。。
as far as….. be concerned 就。。。而言
as concerns 关于
feel/ show concern about /for… 担心、关心、 挂念。。。
one’s concern 某人关心的事
be concerned with 与。。。有关
concerned adj. 有关的， 担心的
concernedly adv. 担忧的
concerning prep. 有关， 关于
【过关练习】
1） __________ that he was no qualifications in business management , Ken plans to grasp the necessary skills by taking a part time course.
A. Concerning B. Concerned
C. Being concerned D. to concern
2) ____________ English is concerned , he is first in our class.
A. As B. As soon as C. As far as D. Now that
2． go through
1） 经历，经受 2) 磨穿某物 3）仔细检查 4）顺利完成
【典型例句】
He is considering all that he has gone through.
They went through our luggage at the customs.
How long will it take you to go through the book?
【拓展】
go about ＝ set out to do sth. 着手干某事
go against 反对， 违背
go by 经过
go over 检查
go on with sth, 继续
go on to do sth.
go on doing sth.
go without sth. 没有某事也行
go wrong 出毛病
go away / out 出去，离开
go after sb./ sth. 追求某人
go mad
go ahead.
go in for.. 参加（考试或比赛）；
【过关练习】
1） It’s ten years since the scientist _______ his life’s work of discovering the valuable chemical.
A. set out B. took off C. turned up D. went about
2) The early pioneers had to ______ many difficulties to settle on the new land.
A. go back on B. go through
C. go into D. go along with
3) I can’t ______ the letter in an hour
A. pass through B. go through C. take through D. come across
4) You have no idea what I’ve had to ______ during the last few months.
A. come through B. go through C. cut through D. look through
5) I don’t ______ rock’ “ n” roll. It’s much too noisy for my tastes. ( 北京)
A．go after B. go away with C. go into D. go in for
3． join in
参加某项（正在进行的）活动， 尤其指娱乐性活动，常代替take part in,
【典型例句】
They came out for their morning exercises, I also joined in
why didn’t Jim join in the conversation?
【类比延伸】
1） attend是正式用语，指参加会议或仪式、婚礼、典礼，听报告等
2） join指加入某个组织、团体，成为其成员之一。如 参军、入团、入党等
3） join in表示“参加正在进行的活动”， 如游戏、讨论、散步
4） take part in 指参加群众性的活动或会议，强调参加者的积极态度，并在活动中起作用
【过关练习】
1） Will you _____ us in the discussion about the students burden of studies?
A. attend B. join in C. take part in D. join
2) When did you ______ the physical training team?
A. join B. take part C. attend D. join in
3) A student began to sing a song , and soon someone else __________.
A. joined B. joined in C. took part in D. took
4) Did John _____ the general cleaning yesterday afternoon?
A. join B. attend C. take D. take part in
part three “ structure
1. while walking the dog , you were careless and got loose and was hit by a car.
【句型概括】
while walking the dog作状语，相当于while you were walking the dog
【拓展】
状语从句的省略：
when, while , as , if , though, where, unless等连词引导状语从句中， 如果谓语动词有be， 而主语又跟主句的主语相同或成为it时， 则从句的主语和be常常省略。
【经典例句】
When (I was) in Japan, I took many beautiful pictures.
while ( I was) waiting, I read newspaper.
He looks as if ( he were) drunk.
【过关练习】
1.) When ____ help, one often says “thank you” or “ It’s kind of you”. (福建)
A. offering B. to offer C. to be offered D. offered
2.)_________ with the size of the whole earth, the biggest ocean does not seem big at all.
(湖北)
A. Compare B. When comparing C. Comparing D. When compared
3.) while watching television , __________ (全国2)
A. the doorbell rang B. the doorbell rings
C. we heard the doorbell ring D. we heard the doorbell rings
4.) when ______ different cultures , we often pay attention only to the differences without noticing the many similarities. ( 20浙江)
A Compared B. being compared
C. comparing D. having compared
2. … but your friend can’t go until he / she finishes cleaning the bicycle.
【句型概况】
not …. until… 结构。 until/ till在肯定句中表示动作的终点，在否定句中则表示动作的起点。until/ till与肯定的主句连用时，主句的谓语动词必须是持续动词，与否定的主句连用时，主句的谓语动词则为瞬间动词。
【典型例句】
I didn’t wake up until I heard the alarm clock.
Wait until the rain stops
【类比延伸】
1） not until 放在句首时必须用部分倒装语序
2） until/till时间状语从句中用一般现在时代替一般将来时，用现在完成时代替将来完成时。
【过关练习】
1．Simon thought his computer was broken _____ his little brother pointed out that he had forgotten to turn it on .( 2005北京春季)
A. until B. unless C. after D. because
2. We were told that we should follow the main road ________ we reached the central railway station. ( 2004辽宁)
A whenever B. until C. while D. wherever
3.She and her family hid away for two years before they were discovered.
【句型概况】
before 引导时间状语从句。 before con. 用以表示从句动作发生之前的时间,，译法灵活。
注意以下句型:
it will be +时间段＋before……. 得过多久才。。。。
It won’t be +时间段＋before…. 用不了多久就。。。
It was时间段＋before…. 过了多久之后才。。。
It wasn’t long before…… 没过多久就。。。
【类比延伸】
1） It will be+ 时间段＋before 从句 （从句用一般现在时表将来） 要过多久才。。。
2）It is / has been + 时间段＋since从句 （从句常用一般过去时，动词是非延续性动词
3) It is + 时间状语＋ that….. 强调句
4）It was +时刻+when从句 当。。。时，是。。。时间了。
【过关练习】
1. – Did Jack come back early last night?
-- Yes. It was not yet eight o’clock _______ he arrived home.
A. before B. when C. that D. until
2. – Why didn’t you tell him about the meeting?
-- He rushed out of the room ______i could say a word . ( 四川)
A. before B. until C. when D. after
3. The American civil war lasted four years _________ the North won in the end. (2005广东)
A. After B. before C. when D. then
篇5：必修1 期中复习（词组）unit5(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Period 1
Pre-class task: 1.Copy and preview new vocabulary of Unit 5.
2. In groups, find out the information about six men :Nelson Mandela, William Tyndale, Norman Bethune, Sun Yat-sen, Gandhi, Neil Armstrong (nationality, career, important events, etc.)
Step 1 Word competition
Part 1: Each group get 5 words to read. Ten points for each.
Group A : hero, accept, period, equal, violence
Group B: peaceful, terror, leader, continue, position
Group C: prison, degree, reward, active, educated
Group D: advise, blanket, youth, principle, quality
Part 2: The quickest to read out the word correctly can get 20 points for his/ her group, but if the answer is wrong,
10 points will be lost. And the students in other groups have a chance to try.
invader, republic, nationalism, livelihood, cruelty, criminal, president, sincerely, Nelson Mandela, William Tyndale, Bible, Gandhi, Elias
Part 3: Ss in any group can participate it. The quickest who gives the correct Chinese/ English meaning of each phrase will get extra 10 points. The wrongs won’t lose points.
lose heart, in trouble, out of work, Youth League, blow up, as a matter of fact, put…in prison, come to power
Step 2 Warming up
1. Get Ss to name some great people.
2. T shows some great people’s pictures.
3. Get Ss to discuss what qualities a great person should have.
(smart, modest, unselfish, warm-hearted, confident, determined, active, honest, brave, persistent,
As a great person,
Should he/she help others?
Should he/she get on well with others?
Should he/she be willing to do public service?
Should he/she be active in society activities?
Should he/she never lose heart when he/she is in great trouble?
(As a great person, he/she should help others, get on well with others, be willing to do public service, be active in society activities and never lose heart when he/she is in great trouble and so on..)
4. Get Ss to decide “What kind of person are you? Do you have the qualities to be a great person?” by finishing the questionnaire on P33.
Step 3 Pre-reading
1. Get Ss to present some information about six men (Nelson Mandela, William Tyndale, Norman Bethune, Sun Yat-sen, Gandhi, Neil Armstrong)
2. Get Ss to discuss “Are they great people? Why?”
4. Go through the information about six men on P33-34.
Step 4 Talking (on P69)
Step 5 Homework
1. Review new words and expressions of Unit 5, and get ready for the dictation.
2. Do SB P35-36 Ex. 1. 2.
3. “中华一题”Section I
4. “English Weekly” Reading Comprehension A
Period 2
Step 1 Dictation (10 words)
Step 2 Homework checking
Step 3 Introduction and lead-in
Re-talk about Nelson Mandela.
Step 4 Reading comprehension
Read the text
1st time: Read the text while listening to the tape and get the general idea of the passage
Q: How many parts can we divide the text into? What’s the main idea of each part?
Part 1 (Para 1-2): The life of Elias before he met Nelson Mandela.
Part 2 (Para3-5): The change of Elias’ life after he met Nelson Mandela and what Mandela did.
2nd time: Read the text again carefully to obtain some details.
Finish Ex 1,2 on P35.
( Ex1: true 2,4
Ex2: 1940 He was born.
1946 He began school.
1948 He left school.
1952 Nelson Mandela opened his law firm.)
Step 5 Discussion
Pair work, discuss
1. How the ANC Youth League fights the government?
2. What can we learn from the text about Nelson Mandela?
(1. At first, the ANC Youth League fought against the government in a peaceful way. But when they failed, they began to use violence.
(2. From the text, we can learn from Mandela the qualities of bravery, persistence, kindness and determination.)
Step 6 Extensive reading
Get Ss to learn more about Nelson Mandela.
1st time: Read the text while listening to the tape.
2nd time: Read the text again carefully to obtain some details.
1) Finish Ex on P38 ( D D B A)
2) Answer the questions: When did Elias lose his job? ( In 1973)
Does Elias like his present work? (Yes. Now at 51 I am proud to…)
Step 7 Homework
1. Read “ Notes to the text” for U5 ( P84-86)
2. Do WB P70 Ex. 1
3. Do SB P37 Ex. 1. 2.
4. “English Weekly” Reading Comprehension B
5. Find out the phrases and expressions according to the Chinese T gives.
Period 3
Step 1 Homework checking
Step 2 Language points
1. fight
1)vt. 和…战斗, 和…打
eg. English fought Germany.
vi. 作战，战斗
*fight for… 为…而战斗
eg. He told the workers to fight for their rights.
*fight against/with… 为反对…而斗争, 和…作斗争
eg. You will have to fight against/with difficulties.
England fought against/with Germany in the war of 1941-1948.
*fight with… 和…一起作战
eg. They fought with the Italians in the last war.
2. advise v.
*advise sb on sth 就…给某人出主意
eg. I have advised you on that subject.
The teacher advised me on how to learn English.
*advise sb to do sth 建议某人干…
eg. The teacher advises me to practise more spoken English.
*advise that sb (should) do sth
eg. I advise that you (should) not eat this kind of fruit.
advice n.[u]
a piece of advice
give sb advice on… 关于….给某人建议
eg. In one of his books, Marx gave some advice on how to learn English.
3. prison
*be in prison 坐牢
be in the prison 在监狱里，可能坐牢，可能工作
eg. He told me that he had been in prison for three years.
*put sb in prison 把…投入监狱
The robber has been put in prison.
*sb be kept/held prisoner 被囚禁
4. accept 接受，指的是主观上接受了
receive 收到，指客观上收到，不一定接受
eg. I received his invitation, but I didn’t accept it.
5. stop…(from) doing sth 阻止...做某事
eg. You must stop him (from) telling his father.
I really want to stop you (from) smoking.
6. educated adj. 受过教育的，有教养的
better educated 是well educated的比较级
7. be sentenced to sth 被判刑
eg. He was sentenced to 3 years in prison.他被判3年监禁.
He was sentenced to death. 他被判死刑.
Step 3 Sentence focus:
1. The school where I had studied only two years was three kilometers away.
be…away 有…远， 可以指距离， 也可以指时间
eg. The new house is about three miles away.
The exams are still three weeks away.
2. After trying hard, I got a job in a gold mine.
after doing 介词短语作状语用，表示时间。*其逻辑主语要与主句主语一致
eg. After getting up, he always drinks a glass of water.
After his mother went out, he began to watch TV. (T)
After going out, he began to watch TV. (F)
3. The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress
see在此句意为见证、目睹；为某事发生之时，主语常为时间
eg. Yesterday saw a terrible car accident in front of our school.
4. The parts of town where they lived were places decided by white people.
主句是The parts of town were places. 定语从句是where they lived
decided by white people 是过去分词作定语，相当于which is decided by white people, 修饰places
5. We were put in a position in which we had either to accept we were less important, or fight the Government.
either…or… 或者…或者…
less + adj./adv.(原级) + than 是形容词（副词）比较级的一种，表示前者不及后者。
此句中，less important是less important than the White 的省略结构
eg. In his life, he has always tried to help those who are less fortunate than he.
6. only then did we decide to answer violence with violence. 只有在这时，我们才决定用暴力反抗暴力。
这是一个倒装句。结构：Only + 状语 + 部分倒装
状语：由副词，介词短语或状语从句构成
*部分倒装用一般疑问句的语序
eg. Only yesterday did his father tell him the truth.
Only by shouting was he able to make people hear him.
Only when his father came back did he go to bed.
*only引导的词不是状语不用倒装
eg. Only he can work out this problem.
7. But I was happy to help because I knew it was to realize our dream of making black and white people equal.
was to do 在此处意为注定将会…
eg. You were to regret your decision later.
8．I felt bad the first time I talked to a group. 第一次给旅行团作讲解时，我的心情很不好。
the first time 起连词的作用，引导时间状语从句
eg. The first time I met him, I thought him nice.
9. We read books under our blankets and used anything we could find to make candles to see the words.
we could find 是定语从句，修饰anything
to make candles及to see the words 是目的状语
10．As they were not cleverer than me, but did pass their exams.
did pass 是强调结构，强调谓语动词时，在动词原形前do / does / did
eg. I do hope you have a nice trip.
He does speak English well.
Step 4 Homework
1. Recite paragraph of the text
2. Do WB P71 Ex 2 Translation (on Ex book)
3. “English Weekly” Multiple choice ,Reading Comprehension C & Cloze test
4. Read P92
Period 4
Step 1 Homework checking
Step 2 Grammar
The Attributive Clause (II)---由关系副词when, where, why引导的定语从句
Basic Rules:
1. 关系副词when在从句中作时间状语
eg. I still remember the day when I first met you.
2. 关系副词where在从句中作地点状语
eg. This shop is the place where I first met you.
3. 关系副词why在从句中作原因状语(先行词只有reason一词)
eg. The reason why he was late was that he missed his train.
4. how不能用作关系副词, 也不能引导定语从句.
This is the way how he did it. (F)
This isthe way (that/ in which ) he did it. (T)
* “English Weekly” when, where, why引导定语从句四注意
Step 3 Practice
Step 4. Homework
1. Do WB P71 Ex 1,2 (on Ex book)
2. Finish “English Weekly”
篇6：模块1 Unit 3 Language 学案(新课标版高一英语必修一学案设计)
Goals：learn the uses of some of the words, phrases and sentence structures in this unit.
Language points
Words
1. prefer :
a: Which kind of transportation do you prefer?
I prefer train.
I prfer to take a train.
I prefer taking a train.
I prefer taking a train to taking a bus.
I prefer to take a train rather than take a bus.
用法总结:a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Translation.
我宁愿洗衣服而不愿做饭。
----------------------------。
我宁愿步行也不愿乘车去那儿。
------------------------------。
2. persuade: Then she persuade me to buy one.
用法总结: ____________________________.
Translation:
She persuaded her son to change his mind.
____________________________________________.
尽管他不想去，我还是说服他去上学。
_____________________________________________________.
Compare：
I advised him to gve up, but he didn’t.
=_______________________________________________.
Translation:__________________________________________.
3. insist: She insisted that she organise the trip properly.
He insisted that he should be treated fairly.
He insisted that he was right.
The baby insisted on coming with me.
用法总结:a.
b.
c.
d
Translation:
1. 我坚决主张我们马上开始。
____________________________________________.
2. He insisted that he had done nothing wrong.
_________________________________________.
4. experience
n. ___________ He is a teacher with much experience.
___________ Travelling along the river is really an interesting experience.
v. ____________. You can experience nature while travelling.
扩展：experienced：词性：_______.
He is an experienced teacher.
Translation:_____________________________.
5. breathe：词性 ________.读音__________.
breath： 词性_________.读音__________.
Phrases:
1. After graduating from college, … 词性：_____________.
After he graduated from college, …. _____________
After graduation from college,…. ______________
类似用法的词还有：________________________
2. She didn’t know the best way of getting to places
做某事的方式（way）
= the way ________________.
= the way that _____________________.
Sentences
1. It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River.
强调句构成：
--------------------。
还原句子:________________________________________.
根据划线部分，把下面句子变成强调句：
I saw him in the street yesterday.
_____________________________________________.
_____________________________________________.
_____________________________________________________.
__________________________________________________.
What he said was interesting.
________________________________________________.
I didn’t leave here until I finished my work.
______________________________________________.
2. When are we leaving and when are we coming back?
用法：
写一个类似用法的句子:_____________________________________.
3. It was fun especially as it gradually became much warmer.
Fun 词性：________名词.
背下列句子：
It is fun to have a cool drink .
What fun it is to jump and sing in a one-horse open sleigh!
Have fun!
4. Once she has made up her mind, nothing can change it.
Once 1. 意思：__________adv.. I have been there once.
Translation: __________________________________________.
2. 意思：__________conj. Once you understand the rule, you’ll have no
further difficulty.
Translation:____________________________________.
Once seen, it can never be forgotten.
答案：
words
1. prefer a. prefer+n
b. prefer+to do
c. prefer+doing
d. prefer doing to doing
e. prefer to do rather than do
translation: I prefer washing to cooking. Or I prefer to wash rather than cook.
I prefer going there on foot to going there by bus.
I prefer to go there on foot rather go there by bus.
2. persuade 总结：persuade sb. to do sth.
Translation: 她说服他儿子改变了主意。
I persuaded him to go there though he didn’t want to.
Compare: = I tried to persuade him to give up， but he didn’t.
Translation: 我试图说服他放弃，但他不听。
3. insist
总结 a. insist +宾语从句（should +原形）
b. insist +宾语从句（should 可省略）
c. insist +宾语从句 （陈述语气）
d. insist on +doing
translation：I insist that we (should) begin at once.
他坚持说他没有做错任何事情。
4. experience
n. 不可数名词
可数名词
v. 体验
扩展 ：形容词
他是一个有经验的老师。
5. breath n. /breZ/ breathe v. /br`:/
Phrases
1. after 词性：介词 连词 介词
类似用法; before
2=the way to get to places
= the way that we could get to places
Sentences
1. 构成： It is(was) +that(who)+其它成分
还原：My sister first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River.
变强调句：
It was I who saw him in the street yesterday.
It was him who I saw in the street yesterday.
It was in the street that I saw him yesterday.
It was yesterday that I saw him in the street.
It was what he said that was interesting.
It was not until I finished my work that I left here.
2. 用法：现在进行时表将来
类似句子：Where are we staying at night?
3 fun：不可数名词
4 曾经，一度 adv. 我曾经去过那里。
一旦 conj. 一旦懂得了这个规则，你就不会再有困难了。
篇7：新课标高一英语模块 1 Unit 1 全单元学案(新课标版高一英语必修一学案设计)
Unit1 Friendship
学习知识清单：
对于要学的知识做到心中有底，这样才能更好的安排自己的学习步骤和学习时间，愿知识清单能够更好的帮助你进行自主学习！
我们将要熟悉的话题：
Friends and friendship; interpersonal relationships
我们将要掌握的词汇及词组：
add point upset ignore calm concern loose cheat reason list share feeling Netherlands German outdoors crazy nature purpose dare thunder entirely power according trust indoors suffer teenager advice questionnaire quiz situation editor communicate habit
add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away set down a series of on purpose in order to face to face according to get along with fall in love join in
我们将要运用的语言功能：
1. 态度(attitudes) Are you afraid that …? I’ve grown so crazy about ….
I didn’t dare ….
2. 同意和不同意（agreement and disagreement） I agree. I think so. Exactly.
I don’t agree. I don’t think so. I’m afraid not.
3.肯定程度（certainty） That’s correct. Of course not.
我们将要学习的语法知识：直接引语和间接引语(1): 陈述句和疑问句
1. 陈述句
“I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.” said Anne.
--Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
2. 一般疑问句
He asked, “Are you leaving tonight?”
--He asked us whether we were leaving that night.
3. 特殊疑问句
“When did you go to bed last night?” father said to Anne.
-- Father asked Anne when she went to bed the night before.
课前自主预习方案
I. 重点单词 (能花十分钟把I和 II两部分的单词和词组在课本中查出来并写上吗？相信自己能够做到！查完了别忘了读一读记一记哦~~)
1. (adj.)心烦意乱的；不安的；不适的; (vt.)使不安；使心烦
2. (vt.)不理睬；忽视; (n.)
3.________(v.) (使)平静；（使）镇定; (adj.)平静的，镇静的，沉着的
4. ________ (vt.) (使)担忧；涉及；关系到; ________(adj.)担心的；忧虑的
5. ________(adj.)德国的; _______(n.)德国; _______(n.) 德国人（复数形式）
6. _________ (adv.)在户外；在野外; _______ (反义词)
7. _________ (adj.)整个的；完全的；全部的; ________ (adv.)
II. 重点短语
1. add ______ 合计
2. calm (…) ______ （使）平静下来；（使）镇定下来
3. be concerned _______ 关心；挂念
4. _______ the dog 遛狗
5. go _______ 经历；经受
6. set _______ 记下；放下；登记
7. a _______ of 一连串的；一系列；一套
8. ________ purpose 故意
9. ________ order to 为了……
10. ________ dusk 在黄昏时刻
11. face _______ face 面对面的
12. ________ longer/ not…any longer 不再……
III. 语篇导读 1）阅读Anne’s best friend, 然后完成下面的表格。(这是细节题，人人可以做到，不信试试看啊，试着在5分钟之内完成，你就很棒了！)
Name:1. _____________ Nationality:2.________________
Place to live in World War II: 3.___________________________.
Reason for being hidden: 4.____________________________.
Being hidden for: 5.________________ years
Caught finally because: 6.____________________.
2) 挑战自我 根据课文内容将下面短文补充完整。(这题是拔高题，考你的记忆能力、理解能力，试着在10分钟之内读完课文然后关书填空，挑战一下自我啊！)
Anne was a little girl who lived in the Netherlands with her family. Because they were Jews, they had to 1 everywhere, 2 they would be caught by the German Nazis. 3 that time she had to regard the diary 4 her only friend, because she thought the diary was a friend 5 she could tell everything to, like her deepest 6 and thoughts. And she needn’t be afraid that it would 7 her, or just couldn’t understand what she was 8 . In one of her diaries, she described how she felt after 9 in the hiding place for over two years: I haven’t been able to be 10 for so long that I’ve grown so 11 about everything 12 with nature, the sky, the song of the birds, the flowers, even the wind and the rain…
课堂自主学习方案
要点探究
I. 词汇知识
1. add up 合计；加起来
①Add up your score and see how many points you get.
累加你的分数，看你能得多少分。
思维拓展：看看还有哪些跟add相关的词组
小试牛刀：
②The bad weather _______________________. 坏天气添加了我们的困难。
③Please _________________________ to the milk. 请往牛奶里加些糖。
④It’s normal that a famous sports player’s cars ________________ five. 一个著名运动员总计有5辆车是很正常的。
2. upset adj.心烦意乱的；不安的；不适的； vt.使不安；使心烦
①Your friend comes to school very upset. 你的朋友来上学时心情很不好。
②There’s no point getting upset about it. 犯不着为这件事烦恼。
③This decision is likely to upset a lot of people. 这项决定很可能会使很多人不快。
小试牛刀：
④He ____________ not being invited to the party. 没有邀请他去聚会，他很不高兴。
⑤Don’t ______________ it. Let’s forget it. 你别为这事心烦了，忘了它吧。
特别提醒：
3. ignore vt.不理睬；忽视
①You will ignore the bell and go somewhere quiet to calm your friend down. 你会顾不上课铃，去一个安静的地方，使你的朋友安静下来。
ignorant adj. 无知的；没有学识的; ignorance n. 无知；（对某事）缺乏认识
②He was driving very fast because he was ignorant of the speed limit. 他的车开得很快，因为他不知道要限速。
小试牛刀：
③He _________________ and goes on the smoking. 他不顾医生的忠告而继续吸烟。
④It is a question that can not _______________________.这是一个不容忽视的问题。
⑤His failure resulted from ______________________.他的失败起因于他的无知。
4. calm vt. & vi. （使）平静；（使）镇定 adj.平静的；镇定的；沉着的
①No one expected that he was so calm when told the bad news. 大家没有料到当被告知这个坏消息时，他如此平静。
②Calm yourself. You should not be so excited. 请镇静，你不该这么激动。
思维拓展：看看还有哪些跟calm相关的词组
③I told myself to calm down. 我告诫自己要冷静下来。
④Keep calm and try not to panic. 沉住气，别惊慌。
潜心辨析：calm/quiet/still/silent
小试牛刀：
⑤Keep ________ while I tie your shoe.
⑥One must keep __________ in time of danger.
⑦Be ___________ when you are at the concert.
⑧I wonder why it’s so __________.
5. concern vt. 涉及；关系到；参与；使担心；使操心；
n. 担心；关心；关注；（利害）关系
①You will tell your friend that you are concerned about him/her and you will meet after class and talk then. 你会告诉你的朋友你很关心他/她，下课后你们会见面交谈。
②The matter concerns the interests of the people. 这件事关系到人民的利益。
③It’s no concern of mine.这事与我无关。
思维拓展：
小试牛刀：
④She _________ a great deal of _________ her son’s illness. 她非常担心儿子的病。
⑤He _______________________ the matter. 他与此事有牵连。
6. go through 经历；经过；穿过；遭受；忍受；获得通过；详细检查，查找；完成
①Or are you afraid that your friend would laugh at you, or would not understand what you are going through? 或者你是不是担心你的朋友会嘲笑你，或会不理解你目前的困境呢？
②May/Might I go through this gate? 我可以通过这道门吗？
③You will go through tough times. 艰难的时候总会过去。
④Let’s go through the plan again.让我们再仔细地讨论这项计划吧。
思维拓展：看看还有哪些跟go相关的词组
小试牛刀：
⑤Some of the students _______________ hardships before they entered the university.
有些大学生在进入大学之前体验过艰苦的生活。
⑥I ____________ all my pockets looking for my keys. 我翻遍了所有的口袋找钥匙。
7. set down=put/write/take down 记下；放下；登记
①You don’t have to set down all that our teacher said. 你不必把老师讲的都记下来。
②How shall I set myself down in the hotel register?
在旅馆的登记簿上，我应如何登记自己的身份呢？
思维拓展：看看还有哪些跟set相关的词组
小试牛刀：
③She _____________ the report after breakfast and handed it in at noon.
她早饭后着手写报告并且中午就上交了。
④If you went to catch that train, we’d better ___________ for the station immediately.
你要是想赶上那班火车，咱们就最好马上动身去火车站。
8. a series of 一连串的；一系列；一套
①Have you seen a series of books like this? 你读过这系列的书吗？
②Then began a series of wet days that spoiled our vacation.接着是一连串的雨天，把我们的假期弄得一团糟。
特别提醒：
小试牛刀：
③A series of films about him _______________ .关于他的一系列电影已经问世了。
④Three series of papers ______________ to the students. 给学生们发了三套试题。
9. on purpose 故意地；有意地
①For example, one evening when it was so warm, I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven in order to have a good look at the moon by myself.比如，有天晚上天气很暖和，我熬到十一点半故意不睡觉，为的是独自好好看看月亮。
②I come to the hospital on purpose to see you.我特地来医院看你。
思维拓展：看看还有哪些跟purpose相关的词组
小试牛刀：
③I didn’t do it ______--it was an accident.我不是故意做这件事的，这是一次意外。
④He went to the USA _______________ further study. 为了深造，他去了美国。
10. in order to 目的是……，以便……，为了……
①In order to catch the train, she hurried through her work.
为了赶火车，她匆匆做完了她的作业。
②In order to be heard by all the students, the teacher spoke in a loud voice.
老师大声讲以便全体同学都能听到。
思维点激：
小试牛刀：
③He bought this present _____________ give his son a surprise.
④He got up early ______________ the early bus.
11. face to face 面对面地；面对着（相当于副词，在句中做状语）
①His ambition was to meet his favorite pop star face to face. 他心里向往的是要面对面地见到他最喜欢的歌星。
思维拓展：类似结构的词组
思维点激：
小试牛刀：
②You’d better _____________ with each other, I think. 我认为你们最好彼此坦诚地谈谈。
③To learn English, one should go __________________. 学习英语要一步一步来。
II. 难句剖析
1. While walking the dog, you were careless and it got loose and was hit by a car.在遛狗的时候，你不小心松了手，结果被一辆汽车撞了。
句中while walking the dog=while you were walking the dog.本句中while后面省略了主语you和be动词were. while或者when引导的时间状语从句中的主语和主句中的主语一致且谓语含有be动词或为it is(was)形式，可省略从句中的主语和be动词。
①While reading the book, he nodded from time to time.
阅读这本书时，他不时地点头。
思维拓展：
②I won’t go to her party, even if (I’m) invited.
即使受到邀请我也不去参加她的聚会。
③Once seen, it’ll never be forgotten. 一旦见到，它将难以被忘记。
小试牛刀：
④He fell asleep while _____(=while he was doing) his homework.他做作业时睡着了。
⑤__________________, I’ll come tomorrow. 必要的话，明天我就来。
2. I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature. 我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故，我变得对一切与大自然有关的事物都无比狂热。
1) 本句是一个复杂的主从复合句。主句中包含if引导的宾语从句，从句中的it’s…that…是一个强调句型结构，强调because引导的原因状语从句，在It is/was + because从句 + that…结构中，because不能换用since或as。
-Why was he punished by his teacher? 他为什么受到老师的惩罚？
-It was because he cheated in the exam. 那是因为他在考试时作弊了。
2) 强调句型可对句中的主语、宾语、表语、状语等进行强调，若强调的主语是人，后面的that 也可以用who代替，可译为“正是……”。
①It was yesterday that I met Ann in the street. 我是昨天在街上遇见安的。
②Was it you that/who let out the secret to her? 是你把这个秘密泄露给她的吗？
归纳总结：
小试牛刀：
③It is he who ______ going to speak at the school meeting.
④It ______ in the street that I met my old friend yesterday.
⑤___________ they launched Shenzhou VII? 他们为什么发射了“神州七号”？
⑥It ______ in ______ the Olympic Games was held successfully in Beijing。
3. …it was the first time in a year and a half that I’d seen the night face to face…
……这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚……
It (This,That) is/was +序数词+time that… 这是/那是某人第一（二、三）次做某事
That引导的定语从句修饰the first time可以省略，从句中的时态常用完成时。如果系动词是is则用现在完成时；如果是was，则用过去完成时。
小试牛刀：
①It is the first time that I _______ such a big watermelon.这是我第一次见这么大的西瓜。
②It was the second time that I ___________ to Europe．那是我第二次去欧洲。
思维拓展：
小试牛刀：
③___________________ the Olympic Games in , 该伦敦举办奥运会了。
=It’s time that London ___________________ the Olympic Games in 2012.
④When I saw him _________________, I thought him very honest. 当我第一次见到他时，我就认为他很诚实。
成果展示
课后自主反思与测评
课后自主反思
同学们，经过了课前自主预习和课堂自主学习之后，相信你一定有了一些收获吧，是掌握了必须学习的知识点? 或是掌握了一些学习上的技巧与方法? 或者还有什么有待改进的地方？在下面动笔写写吧，善于总结的学生才是会学习的学生！
⑴这一阶段我学会了这样一些语言知识：
单词和词组：____________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________ _ _
语法点： ____________________________________________________________ _
________________________ ___
______________________________________________________________________ _ _
⑵这一阶段我突破了这样一些重难点：
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _ _ ⑶这一阶段我觉得还需要提高的是：
________________________ ___
______________________________________________________________________ _ _
课后自主测评
C级测评：
（高楼大厦平地起，你能很踏实的学习基础知识，很好！请在12分钟内完成）
I. 单词拼写
1. He knew there was a speed limit, but he i___________ it and drove very fast.
2. He felt u__________ about losing the money.
3. It’s good for us to do exercise o__________ every morning.
4. It’s d__________ everywhere in the house. Can you help me do the housecleaning?
5. A s_________ of TV play is on Channel 1 these days.
6. The boy hid himself behind the __________ (窗帘) and looked out through the window.
7. Was it an accident or did David do it on ___________(故意)？
8. From the beginning, Paul made it clear that he would be _________ (完全地)in control.
9. The snow is very ___________(疏松)and there is a lot of air in it.
10. I did everything in my ___________(能力，力量)to help her.
II.用所给短语的正确形式填空
1. We spent several days ____________ all related reference materials.
2. His income ________ to 1,000 yuan a month.
3. Please don’t ________ me; I’m fine now.
4. At last the wind ______________.
5. He ___________ a basket on the ground, washed his hands, and then sat down.
6. I can’t stand the pain ________________.
7. The thief _____________ in a friend’s house for several weeks after the robbery.
8. ____________ make his spoken English better, he practises speaking English every day.
9. The street lights come on ______________ and go off at dawn.
10. Maybe one day we could meet _________________________.
B级测评：
（学贵在用，你能运用所学知识，又向前跨了一步！如果能在13分钟内完成就更好了）
I.单项填空
1. I have never seen him _______ since I last saw him.
A. any more B. any longer C. no more D. no longer
2. Paper of this kind easily _______.
A. catches fire B. is on fire C. makes fire D. set fire to
3. I'm not sure _______ he will come here today.
A. that B. if C. where D. when
4. What he said is _______.We are _______ at his words.
A. bored; boring B. boring; bored C. bored; bored D. boring; boring
5.-David has made no mistakes recently. -_______ and _______.
A. So has he; so he has B. So he has; so have you
C. So has he; so have you D. So have you; so he has
6. After he finished _______ his homework, he _______ his mother do some homework.
A. to do; kept on doing B. doing; went on to help
C. done; kept helping D. doing; went on helping
7.-I like swimming but I don't like to swim today. -_______.
A. So do I B. So I do C. So it is with me D. I do so
8._______ you begin to do something, you must do it well. That's the way.
A. Because B. Imagine C. Suppose D. Once
9. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him _______.
A. not to B. not to do C. not to do it D. do not to
10. A person should be _______ to his own country. He should not do anything against his country.
A. kind B. loyal C. honest D. brave
11.-_______? -He is kind, and tall in height, with big eyes.
A. What is he like B. How is he C. What is he D. What does he do
12.-I'm sorry I can't go to the cinema with you this evening. -If you don't,_______.
A. so do I B. so will I C. neither will I D. neither do I
13. You could see the signs clearly _______ the light of the moon.
A. by B. with C. in D. under
14. I'd prefer doing the job by myself _______ someone else for help.
A. to ask B. to asking C. to ask for D. ask
15. _______ the beginning of the meeting, we sang a song together.
A. In B. At C. On D. Of
II.阅读理解
Dear Mr.Harrington,
I saw your name on a list of teachers of French who wished to spend their holidays in France this summer. I'm a teacher of English in Saint-Simon, a small village in the Loire Valley, just south of Saumw. I should very much like to spend some time in England, because it is many years since I had a chance to practise my English. Perhaps we could exchange houses for three weeks in late July or early August.
I have heard a lot about a holiday in Cumbria and the Lake District. I have been eager to spend a holiday in Cumbria ever since I first saw pictures of the fox-hunting, and read about the fine hunting dogs that you have in your part of the country. I am very interested in fox-hunting and I take my dogs out hunting in the local forest whenever I can.
I shall tell you more about Saint-Simon countryside when you express interest in my plan. I look forward to hearing from you.
Yours Sincerely,
Jean-Baptiste Foucault
1. Mr. Foucault wants to visit England _______.
A. to meet his old school friend Harrington
B. in order to use and improve his English
C. because it is many years since he had a holiday
D.because he wants to go fox-hunting there
2. Mr. Foucault plans to _______.
A. spend three weeks in Saint-Simon in the Loire Valley
B. stay with Mr. Harrington in England so that they can talk English together
C. invite Mr. Harrington in England to stay with him in France in July
D. stay in Harrington's house while Mr. Harrington stays in his
3. Mr. Foucault wishes to spend a holiday in Cumbria because _______.
A. he is interested in fox-hunting
B. there are many forests where he can take his dog hunting
C. he has heard a lot about the good English spoken in Cumbria
D. the first pictures of England he saw were of Cambria and Lake District
4. Mr. Foucault does not say much about Saint-Simon because _______.
A. Mr. Harrington has been there and seen it for himself
B. it is such a small village that there is very little to say about it
C. he wants to know first whether Mr. Harrington is interested in his plan
D. He knows Mr. Harrington will not be interested in Saint-Simon
5. Mr. Harrington is a teacher who _______.
A. teaches English in France B. teaches French in France
C. teaches English in England D. teaches French in England
A级测评：
(你很了不起！能够选择做A级测评题，因为这是一部分拔高题。如果能够在5分钟完成就更好了！)
完成句子，根据汉语意思用上括号中所给的单词完成句子。
1._____________ (在读这本书的时候)，he nodded from time to time. (while;非谓语动词)
2.____________________(是在街上)I met an old friend of mine. (it)
3.It was the first time that I ________________ (到北京来). (come)
4.He said that he __________________ (在听音乐)when she came in. (listen)
5.Father asked Peter ____________________ (何时去睡觉的)last night. (when)
成果展示
课前自主预习方案
认真阅读教材，花十分钟完成下列练习
1.重点单词
1.___________(v.)安家；安居；解决___________(n.)
2.___________(v.)遭受；忍受；经历___________(n.)
3.___________(n.)自然___________(adj.)____________(adv.)
4.___________(v.)躲藏____________(过去式)_____________(过去分词)
5.___________(vi.& vt.)痊愈；恢复；重新获得_____________(n.)
2.重点短语
1. be worried __________ 担忧；担心
2. take no notice _________ 不注意
3. suffer _________ 遭受
4. recover __________ 从……中恢复，康复
5. pack (sth.) _________ 打包
3.语法练习
（将下列句子由直接引语变为间接引语，由间接引语变为直接引语）
1. “Do you like listening to pop music?” he asked us.
___________________________________________
2. “I’m going to hide from the Germans.” said Anne.
___________________________________________
3. Mary asked her mother what she should do.
___________________________________________
4. “How can you see your friends?” Anne said to her sister.
___________________________________
课堂自主学习方案
I. 要点探究
1. She found it difficult to settle and … 她发现很难安定下来……
She作主语；found 为谓语；it作形式宾语，difficult作宾语补足语；to settle…动词不定式作真正的宾语。find it + 宾补 + to do
I find it difficult to talk with you about anything serious.
我觉得很难同你谈任何严肃的事。
I think it necessary to tell them all about the matter.
我认为有必要把事情的全部告诉他们。
settle vi. 安家；定居；停留 vt.（使）定居；安排；解决
settle down 安居/安定下来
He settled in the country after he returned from abroad. 从国外回来后他在乡下定居。
2. She suffered from loneliness, but she had to learn to like it there. 她遭受孤独的折磨，但是她得学会喜欢呆在那里。
suffer vt. 遭受；忍受；经历，后面常接pain, defeat, loss, poverty, hunger等名词。
vi.受痛苦，患病。常用suffer from结构。
① Iraq suffered serious damage from the war.
伊拉克因战争而遭受了严重的破坏。
② He is suffering from cancer. 他患上了癌症。
小试牛刀：
③ The young man ____________ a bad cold the other day and was sent to hospital.
前几天，那个年轻人患上了重感冒被送往了医院。
④ In order to send me to college, my parents ____________________________.
为了送我去上大学，我的父母亲受了很多苦。
3. How can Linda recover from her illness in this room…? 琳达在这个房间里怎么能够从病中康复呢……？
recover vi.& vt. 痊愈；恢复；重新获得，常与介词from 连用。
① She has covered her health. 她已恢复了健康。
② I think he will recover from his bad cold soon. 我想不久他的重感冒会好的。
③ Jane recovered her lost wallet. 简找到了丢失的钱包。
4. “ I’ve got tired of looking at nature through dirty curtains and dusty windows” Anne said to her father.安妮对爸爸说：“我已经厌倦了透过脏兮兮的窗帘和沾满灰尘的窗子观看大自然了”
get tired of 意为“厌倦，厌烦”；有时我们也可以用be tired of, 同义词有：be sick of; be bored of; be fed up with.
① I’m tired of his silly questions. 我已经厌倦了他那些愚蠢的问题。
② I got tired of so much reading. 我厌倦了如此大量的阅读。
潜心辨析：
小试牛刀：
③ We _____________________ having the same kind of food every day.天天吃同样的食物，我们都吃腻了。
④ She was tired ____ ____ teaching, but she was never tired ________ teaching. 她教课累了，但是她绝不厌烦教学。
⑤ I was completely __________ after all that. 作了那么多事以后，我感到筋疲力尽
5. I need to pack up my things in the suitcase very quickly, … 我需要很快把衣箱里的东西打包……
pack up 将（东西）装箱打包
① I packed up all my books into boxes. 我把所有的书都装进了箱子。
② Please help me pack up my things. 请帮我把东西装箱打包。
II. 语法突破
直接引语和间接引语
直接引用别人的话叫直接引语。用自己的话转述别人的话叫间接引语。这两种引语都是
宾语从句，但直接引语放在引号内，不用连词连接；间接引语不用引号，通常用连词连接主语。
一、陈述句直接引语变间接引语
直接引语如果是陈述句，在变为间接引语时，用连词that引导（that在口语中常省略），从句的人称、时态、指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等都要作相应的变化。
直接引语转换为间接引语需要注意一下几点：
1. 人称的变化
(1) He said, “I like it very much.” 他说：“我非常喜欢它。”
He said that he liked it very much. 他说他非常喜欢它。
(2) He said to me, “I’ve left my book in your room.”
他说对我说：“我把书放在你的房间里了。”
He told me that he had left his book in my room.
他告诉我把书放在我的房间里了。
总结：直接引语变间接引语后，人称要做相应的变化。
2. 时态的变化：
(1) “ I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary,” said Anne.
安妮说：“ 我不想在日记里记流水帐。”
Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
安妮说她不想在日记里记流水帐。
(2) He said, “I’m using the knife.” 他说：“我正在用刀。”
He said that he was using the knife. 他说他正在用刀。
(3) She said, “I have not heard from him since May.”
她说: “我自从五月份起就没有收到他的来信。”
She said that she had not heard from him since May.
她说她自从五月份起就没有收到他的来信。
(4) He said, “I saw her in the street.” 他说：“ 我在街上看见过她了。”
He said that he had seen her in the street. 他说他在街上看见过她了。
(5) He said, “I have finished my homework before supper.”
他说：“ 我在午饭前已经完成了我的家庭作业。”
He said that he had finished his homework before supper.
他说他在午饭前已经完成了他的家庭作业。
(6) Zhou Lan said, “I’ll do it after class.” 周兰说：“我会课后完成它。”
Zhou Lan said that she would do it after class. 周兰说她会在课后完成它。
总结：
直接引语与间接引语时态变化对照一览表
直接引语 间接引语
一般现在时 一般过去时
现在进行时 过去进行时
现在完成时 过去完成时
一般过去时 过去完成时
过去完成时 过去完成时
一般将来时 过去将来时
3. 指示代词、时间状语、地点状语和动词的变化
(1) She said: “I will come this morning.” 她说：“我上午会来。”
She said that she would go that morning. 她说她上午会来。
(2) He said, “these books are mine.” 他说：“这些书是我的。”
He said that those books were his. 他说这些书是他的。
(3) He said,“it is nine o’clock now.” 他说：“现在9点了。”
He said that it was nine o’clock then. 他说那会儿9点了。
(4) He said, “My sister was here three days ago.”
他说：“我妹妹三天前在这里。”
He said that his sister had been there three days before.
他说他妹妹三天前曾在这里。
(5) He said, “I haven’t seen her today.” 他说：“我今天还没有见过她。”
He said that he hadn’t seen her that day. 他说他那天没有见过她。
(6) She said, “I went there yesterday.” 她说：“我昨天在那里。”
She said that she had gone there the day before 她说她昨天去过那里。
(7) She said, “I’ll go there tomorrow.” 她说：“我明天会去那里。”
She said that she would go there the next/following day.
她说她明天会去那里
(8) He said, “They will arrive the day after tomorrow.”
他说：“他们后天到那里。”
He said that they would arrive in two days’ time. 他说他们两天后到那里。
(9) She said, “I came here to seen the doctor the day before yesterday.”
她说：“我前天到这里看医生。”
She said she had gone there to see the doctor two days before.
她说她两天前到这里看医生。
时间状语、地点状语和动词的变化一览表
直接引语 间接引语
时间状语 now then
today that day
this week/month/year that week/month/year
last week/month/year the week/month/year before
tomorrow the next/following day
next week/month/year the next week/month/year
地点状语 here there
动词 come go
注意：
① 直接引语如果是客观真理，变为间接引语时，时态不变。如：
He said,“Light travels much faster than sound.”
He said that light travels much faster than sound”
② 如果在当地转述，here不必改为 there，动词come不必改为go，如果在当天转述，yesterday, tomorrow等时间状语也不必改变.
二、疑问句
● 一般疑问句
(1) “Do you think a diary can become your friend?” the writer says.
作者问：“你认为日记能成为你的朋友吗？”
The writer asks us if we think a diary can become our friend.
作者问我们是否认为日记能成为我们的朋友
(2) She said, “did you see him last night?” 她问：“你昨天晚上看到他了吗？”
She asked me whether I had seen him the night before.
她问我前一天是否看到他了。
总结：
将一个一般疑问句由直接引语变成间接引语时，首先要用whether/if 连接，而且要把原来的疑问句变成陈述句语序的宾语从句； 其次，人称、时态和状语的变化与陈述句直接引语变为间接引语的方法相同。
● 特殊疑问句
(1) “ What do you want?” he asked me. “你想要什么？”他问我。
He asked me what I wanted. 他问我想要什么。
(2) “ When did you go to bed last night?” father said to Anne.
爸爸问安妮：“你昨晚什么时间睡的觉？”
Father asked Anne when she went to bed the night before
爸爸问安妮她头天晚上什么时间睡的觉。
总结：
把一个特殊疑问句由直接引语变成间接引语时，首先要用疑问词连接引语，而且要把原来的疑问句变成陈述句语序的宾语从句；其次，人称、时态和状语部分的变化与陈述句的直接引语变为间接引语的方法相同。
课后自主反思与测评
课后自主反思
同学们，这一课时主要内容是语法知识，经过了课前自主预习和课堂自主学习之后，相信你一定有了一些收获吧， 或者还有什么有待改进的地方？在下面动笔写写吧，善于总结的学生才是会学习的学生！
⑴这一阶段我学会了这样一些语言知识：
单词和词组：____________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________ _ _
语法点： ____________________________________________________________ _
________________________ ___
______________________________________________________________________ _ _
⑵这一阶段我突破了这样一些重难点：
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _ _ ⑶这一阶段我觉得还需要提高的是：
________________________ ___
______________________________________________________________________ _ _
课后自主测评
C级测评：
（高楼大厦平地起，很高兴你能很踏实的学习基础知识，请在5分钟内完成）
I. 单词拼写
1. Her relatives have come to America and ________________(定居)in Boston.
2. We are on the _____________ to progress.
3. I haven’t fully _____________(康复)from that flu I had.
4. She put all her clothes in a big ____________(手提箱)when she traveled
5. An ___________(外套)is a warm coat that you wear in cold weather.
II 句型转换
1. “I’m going to London next month,” my sister said to me.
My sister told me _____________________________________.
2. Mr. Smith said, “How long did it take you to fly to New York, John?”
Mr. Smith ___________________________________________.
3. “Do you think a diary can become your friend?” the writer asked.
The writer asked us ____________________________________.
4. He asked whether I had watched the TV play the night before.
“________________________________?”he asked.
5. “When did you go to bed last night? ” Father said to Peter.
Father ________ Peter __________________________ to bed last night.
B级测评：
（学贵在用，你能运用所学知识，又向前跨了一步！如果能在7分钟内完成就更好了）
单项选择
1. He said that his car _____ stolen and he _____ have to telephone the police.
A. was; would B. has been; will C. had been; would D. had been; will
2. He told us he ________ a concert ________.
A. had attended; three days before B. attended; a week ago
C. would attend; since a week ago D. was attending; for a week
3. -When Tom ______, please let me know. -Mary said when Tom ______, just tell her about it.
A. comes; comes B. came; came C. comes; came D. comes; coming
4. The teacher said that Columbus _______ America in 1492.
A. discovered B. found C. had discovered D. had found
5. After the examination, my teacher told me that failure _______ the mother of success.
A. was B. is C. be D. been
6. The child asked his mother ________ go out to play tennis.
A. that he could B. if he could C. if could he D. that could he
7. Mr. Brown said he _______ me the next week.
A. would see B. will see C. had seen D. saw
8. The mother asked her son _______.
A. what did he do the day before B. where did he find his lost wallet
C. what time he got up that morning D. that if he had finished his homework
9. He asked me _______ I would go to Beijing by air the next day.
A. that if B. if C. that whether D. how
10. The teacher told the students that there ________ a meeting at three o’clock.
A. were going to have B. are going to be C. will have D. was going to be
A级测评：
(你很了不起！能够选择做A级测评题，因为这是一部分拔高题。如果能够在5分钟完成就更好了！)
完成句子
1. 妈妈告诉儿子让他呆在家里直到他回来。
____________________________________________________________________.
2. 保罗说他们队赢了比赛。
____________________________________________________________________.
3. 他说他在这儿住已很多年了。
____________________________________________________________________.
4. 妈妈问我是否做完作业了。
____________________________________________________________________.
5. 一个小男孩问我火车什么时候开。
____________________________________________________________________.
6. 他问我那天晚上是否看到他姐姐了。
____________________________________________________________________.
课后自主反思与测评
课后自主反思
同学们，这一课时主要内容是语言的运用，你有了什么样的收获， 或者还有什么有待改进的地方？在下面动笔写写吧，善于总结的学生才是会学习的学生！
⑴这一阶段我学会了这样一些语言知识：
单词和词组：___________________________________________________ ________ __
___________________________________________________________________ __ ____
___________________________________________________________________ __ ____
⑵这一阶段我突破了这样一些重难点：
__________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________ __ ____
___________________________________________________________________ __ ____
⑶这一阶段我觉得还需要提高的是：
_____________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________ __ ____
___________________________________________________________________ __ ____
课后自主测评
C级测评：
（高楼大厦平地起，你能很踏实的学习基础知识，很好！请在3分钟内完成，同时试着翻译一下句子啊）
单词拼写
1. The number of ____________(青少年)smokers is on the rise in China, according to a report published in Beijing.
2. Let me give you a piece of _____________(建议) on how to learn English.
3. Seafood always _________________(不适合)with me.
4. He’s in a difficult _______________(境遇)and doesn’t know what to do.
5. We can ______________(交际)with people in most parts of the world by telephone.
B级测评：
（学贵在用，你能运用所学知识，又向前跨了一步！如果能在7分钟内完成就更好了）
单项填空
1. We’re going to play basketball. Would you like to ________?
A. join B. join in C. attend D. take part in
2. We can communicate ______ people in every part of the world ______ the Internet.
A. with; with B. with; through C. through; through D. through; with
3. _______ is a good firm of exercise for both young and old.
A. The walk B. Walking C. To walk D. Walk
4. The rain ______ the beauty of the West Lake. It looked more attractive.
A. added to B. added C. added up to D. added up
5. He asked me ______ with me. A. what the matter is
B. what the matter was C. what’s the matter D. what was the matter
6. Mike _____ with Janet for over one year before they got married.
A. had fallen in love B. had been in love C. has fallen in love D. has been in love
7. Readers can _____ quite well without knowing the exact meaning of each word.
A. get over B. get in C. get along D. get through
8. I don’t think she is a nice woman; I am ______ her empty talk.
A. grateful for B. tired of C. crazy about D. concerned about
9. –Sorry to have kept you waiting. –_______ .
A. It’s all right. B. It doesn’t matter C. No worry. D. That’s right.
10. I am _____ to you for the chance to express my feeling.
A. helpful B. hopeful C. grateful D. useful
11. I often ______ him for advice on my work and he is always willing to _____ me some.
A. give; ask B. ask; give C. ask; take D. give; give
12. He has some trouble ______ his classmates, but he has no trouble _______ doing his lessons.
A. with; with B. in; in C. with; in D. in; with
A级测评：
(你很了不起！能够选择做A级测评题，因为这是一部分拔高题。如果能够在5分钟完成就更好了！) 完成句子
1. 我第一眼就喜欢上了这套房子。（fall in love）
I _______________________________________ at first sight.
2. 他们一起唱这首歌。（join in）
They all ____________________________________.
3. 和他相处是很有趣的。（get on/along with）
It is interesting _______________________________.
4. 对于我们应该做什么，我常常跟他意见不一致。（disagree）
I often __________________________ what we ought to do.
5. 我极讨厌打牌赌钱。（dislike）
I have ________________________ playing cards for money.
6. 我非常感激你没有对我们老板说这件事情。（grateful）
I _________________________________________.
成果展示
【题目要求】
你（李华）的英国朋友Jack来信，就“如何交友”向你征求建议，请你给他回信就该问题谈谈你的建议。回信时间：9月1日。
词数：120~150.
【要点词汇】写出下列单词或短语
1.就某事向某人征求建议______________________________
2.依某人之见______________________________
3.作为回报________________________________
4.使某人干某事___________________________
5.信任某人_________________________________
6.期待_____________________________________
【主要句型】
1.你在信中就如何交友向我征求意见。
In your letter you ______________________________________.
2.在我看来，友谊对我们大家来说都很重要。
In my opinion, ________________________________________.
3.对他人微笑，作为回报，我们一定能得到微笑。
Smile at others, ________________________________________.
4.多为他人着想，不要以貌取人。
_________________________________ and don’t judge a person by his or her appearance.
5.而且，千万不要相信那些在我们有麻烦时离我们而去的人。
__________, never believe in those ________________________.
6.我盼望着你的来信。
_____________________________________________________.
【自主操练】
Dear Jack, Sept.1, ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Yours ever,
Li Hua
【范文示例】
Dear Jack, Sept.1,2009
I am glad to hear from you. In your letter you asked me for some advice on how to make friends. In my opinion, friendship is very important to us all. Everyone needs friends. To make friends, we must be friendly to others. Smile at others and we are sure to get a smile in return. We should try to make a stranger feel at home. Think more of others than of ourselves and don’t judge a person by his or her appearance.
When we don’t agree with someone, don’t quarrel but discuss with him or her. Besides, never believe in those who leave us when we are in trouble. Remember: A friend in need is a friend indeed.
What do you think of my advice? Can you give me yours? I am looking forward to hearing from you.
Best wishes.
Yours ever,
Li Hua
【探究策略】
1.建议信的语言
(1)陈述建议的语言必须中肯：在劝说对方接受你的建议时，应该注意措辞，慎用must等命令词汇，这样才能使对方高兴地接受你的劝告或建议。例如：You must stop your meaningless work at once. （该句中的情态动词must就使句子的语气显得很生硬，对方会因此而反感。）
此外，要“设身处地”，可适当运用虚拟句“If I were you,…”表述自己的建议。常见的此类表达有：maybe; perhaps; probably; in my opinion; You could/might/had better…; It seems better that …; Why not …; If I do this, ; as you have known; Facts prove that …; even if/ though等。
(2)陈述建议必须有说服性：要想提出好建议，必须具有充分的理由，展示出自己独特的见解。常见的表达有：If you think it twice, you will find…; As is well known,…; It is necessary/ important/certain that…; in spite of; on the contrary; in other words等。
2. 建议信的结构
建议信一般采取“三段式结构”，通常以firstly, secondly, thirdly或to begin with, then, later等依次陈述建议。
首段：针对对方对自己的信任简单表示感谢，亦可表明自己的诚意。
中段：围绕对方的困惑、烦恼等问题，结构清晰、用语科学委婉地建议方法。注意充分考虑到对方实际问题，表达时应选择得体用语。切忌用语生硬强制，泛泛而谈。
尾段：简单予以希望。希望自己的建议能对对方有所帮助。
成果展示
Keys to Unit1
[课前自主预习方案]
I. 重点单词
1.upset; upset 2.ignore; ignorance 3.calm; calm 4.concern; concerned 5. German; Germany; Germans 6.outdoors; indoors 7.entire; entirely
II. 重点短语
1. up 2. down 3. about 4. walk 5. through 6. down 7.series 8. on 9.in 10.at 11. to 12. no
III. 语篇导读
1) 1. Anne Frank 2. Jewish 3. Amsterdam(Netherlands) 4.They were Jewish and would be caught by the German Nazis 5. two
6. they were discovered
2) 1. hide (away) 2. or 3. During 4. as 5. whom 6. feelings 7. laugh at 8. going through 9. being 10. outdoors 11. crazy 12. to do
[课堂自主学习方案]
要点探究
I.词汇知识
1. ②added to our difficulty ③add some sugar to ④add up to
2. ④was upset at/about ⑤upset yourself about
3. ③ignores the doctor’s advice ④be ignored ⑤his ignorance
4. ⑤still ⑥calm ⑦silent ⑧quiet
5. ④showed; concern about/for ⑤was concerned with
6. ⑤had gone through ⑥went through
7. ③set about writing ④set off
8. ③has come out ④are/ were handed out
9. ③on purpose ④for/with the purpose of
10. 思维点激 in order to/ so as to 相同点：1)不定式的逻辑主语应与句子的主语保持一致；2)由肯定形式变否定形式时，都是在to前加not; 3)如果表目的的是一个句子，可以换用in order that 或so that来引导，从句中常用情态动词can, may, could, might, will等。不同点：in order to 可以用于句首，但so as to不可以。
③in order to ④in order not to/so as not to miss
11. 思维点激 face to face相当于副词，在句中做状语；face-to-face相当于形容词，在句中做前置定语
②have a heart-to-heart talk ③step by step
II . 难句剖析
1. ④doing ⑤If necessary
2. 2) ③is ④was ⑤Why was it that ⑥was; that
3. ①have seen ②had been ③It is time for London to hold ④for the first time
[课后自主反思与测评]
C级测评：
I. 单词拼写
1. ignored 2.upset 3.outdoors 4.dusty 5.series 6.curtain 7.purpose 8.entirely 9.loose 10.power
II. 用所给短语的正确形式填空
1.going through 2.adds up 3.be concerned about 4.calmed down 5.set down 6.any longer 7.hid away 8.In order to 9.at dusk 10.face to face
B级测评：
Ⅰ.1~5 AABBB 6~10 BCDAB 11~15 ACABB Ⅱ.1~5 BDACD
A级测评：
1.While reading the book, 2. It was in the street that 3. had come to Beijing 4.was listening to music 5. when he went to bed
[课前自主预习方案]
重点单词
1.settle; settlement 2.suffer; suffering 3.nature; natural; naturally 4. hide; hid; hidden 5.recover; recovery
重点短语
1. about 2.of 3. from 4. from 5.up
语法练习
1. He asked us if we liked listening to pop music.
2. Anne said that she was going to hide from the Germans.
3. Mary asked, “Mother, what shall I do?”
4. Anne asked her sister how she could see her friends.
[课堂自主学习方案]
要点探究
2. ③suffered from ④suffer(ed) a lot
4. ③are/get tired of ④with; of ⑤tired out
[课后自主反思与测评]
C级测评：
I. 单词拼写
1.settled 2.highway 3.recovered 4.suitcase 5.overcoat
II 句型转换
1.that she was going to London the next month 2.asked how long it took John to fly to New York 3.if a diary could become our friend 4.Did you watched TV last night 5.asked; when he went
B级测评：
单项选择
1-5 CACAB 6-10 BACBD
A级测评：
完成句子。
1. Mother told her son that he must stay at home until she came back.
2. Paul said that their team had won the match.
3. He said that it was many years since he came to live here.
4. Mother asked me if/whether I had finished my homework.
5. A small boy asked me when the train would leave.
6. He asked me if/whether I had seen his sister that night.
[课前自主预习方案]
I. 重点单词
1. teenager 2. grateful 3. tip 4.swap 5.item 6.exactly 7.disagree; disagreement 8. dislike; like
II. 重点短语
1. along/on 2.in 3.effort 4.in 5.to 6.with
[课堂自主学习方案]
I. 要点探究
词汇知识
1. ③gets on/along well with ④are you getting on/along with
2. ②fell in love with ③ was in love with
3. ③join…in ④took part in ⑤attend ⑥joined
[课后自主反思与测评]
C级测评：
单词拼写1. teenager 2.advice 3.disagrees 4.situation 5.communicate
B级测评：单项填空1-5 BBBAD 6-10 BCBBC 12-12BC
A级测评：1.fall in love with the house 2. join in singing the song
3.to get on/along with him 4.disagree with him about
5.a strong dislike for 6.am grateful that you didn’t tell our boss about this
【要点词汇】
1. ask sb. for some advice on sth. 2.in one’s opinion 3.in return 4.let/have/make sb. do sth. 5. believe in sb. 6.look forward to
【主要句型】
1.asked me for some advice on how to make friends 2.friendship is very important to us all
3.and we are sure to get a smile in return 4.Think more of others than of ourselves
5.Besides; who leave us when we are in trouble 6.I am looking forward to learning from you
篇8：Teaching Plan For Unit 1 (新课标版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
Teaching Plan For Unit 1
Teaching Materials & Analysis Contents Warming Up P1
Pre-reading P1
Reading P1-2
Comprehending P2
Learning about Language
Discovering useful words & expressions
Discovering useful structures P3-4
Using Language Listening & speaking P5-8
Reading, speaking & writing
Summing up
Workbook & Test P41-47
Importance 1. Have students learn some useful new words and expressions and let them learn effective ways to remember English vocabulary.
2. Get students to learn about the history of the Amber Room and famous cultural relics in China and abroad to stimulate their sense of cultural relics protection.
3. Enable students to learn to tell the difference between facts and opinions to train their thinking and analyzing ability.
4. Let students learn to give opinions and ask for opinions in English.
5. Let students learn the. new grammar item：the restrictive attributive clause and non-restrictive attributive clause.
6. Develop students’listening，speaking，reading and writing ability
Difficulties 1. Train students' thinking and analyzing ability by making them learn to tell from facts and opinions.
2. Develop students’ speaking ability by encouraging them to give opinions and ask for opinions in English.
3. Develop students’integrated skills.
Teaching Aims Topic cultural relics protection；
famous cultural relics in China and abroad
Vocabulary Words race，valuable，survive，vast，dynasty，amaze，amazing，select，honey，design，fancy，style，decorate，jewel，artist， belong，troop，reception，remove，wooden，doubt，former，worth，local，apart，painting，castle，trial，evidence，explode，entrance，sailor，sink，maid，informal，debate
Expressions in search of，belong to，in return，at war，less than，take apart，think highly of
Functional Items 1）Asking for opinions
2）Giving opinions
Structures the attributive clause
Arrangement
of time 1st Warming Up Pre-reading Reading Comprehending
2nd Language points
3rd Grammar
4th Using Language: Reading & talking
5th Using Language: Listening & speaking
6th Using Language: Reading & writing 1）Asking for opinions
7th Revision
1）Asking for opinions
The 1st Period
Unit 1 Contents Warming Up Pre-reading Reading Comprehending
Teaching Aims Knowledge Vocabulary words rare，valuable，survive，vase，dynasty，amaze，select，honey，design，fancy，style，decorate，jewel，artist，belong，troop，reception，remove，wooden，doubt，former，worth
phrases in search of，be long to，in return，at war，less than
1. Get students to learn the useful new words and expressions in this part.
2. Let students learn about the history of the Amber Room.
Ability 1. Let students read the passage In Search of the Amber Room to develop their reading ability.
2. Enable students to learn to talk about cultural relics.
Emotion 1. Stimulate students’sense of cultural relic`s protection by reading the passage In Search of the Amber Room．
2. Develop students’sense of cooperative learning.
Analysis
of the teaching materials Importance 1. Let students read the passage In Search of the Amber Room and learn about the history of the Amber Room.
2. Get students to learn different reading skills.
Difficulties 1. Develop students’reading ability.
2. Enable students to learn to talk about cultural relics.
Multimedia Computer PPT CD
Teaching & Learning methods 1. Task-based Teaching & Learning
2. Cooperative learning
3. Discussion
Teaching Procedures
The 1st Period
Step 1 Warming up
1. Warming up by looking and talking
2. Give students 4 minutes to read the passage carefully，and do Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 in Comprehending on page 2.
3. Listening and reading aloud
Play the tape of the text for students to listen to and follow. Then ask them to read the text aloud.
4. Deal with some new words，expressions and structures.
5. Discussion of style. Let students discuss the following questions：，
How does this passage present facts about the Amber Room? Can you find the opinions?
What is the author's attitude towards the Amber Room? How do you know?
Step 2 Pre- reading
Turn to page 1 and finish Pre- reading part.
Step 3 Reading
1. Skimming for the general idea of each paragraph
Ask students to read the passage fast to get the key words and general idea of each paragraph and fill in the chart.
The general ideas
Paragraph The History of the Amber Room
1
2
3
4
5
2. Scanning for detailed information
Ask students to read the passage carefully to locate the detailed information.
Do Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 in Comprehending on page 2.
3. Deal with any language problems students might meet while checking the
answers with the whole class.
4. Reading aloud and underlining
Ask students to read the passage aloud to the tape and let them pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence. Tell them to pick out all the useful expressions or collocations from the passage while reading and copy them to the notebooks after class as homework.
be used to do...， be made into， make the design for the room，
feel as hard, as stone， be of the fancy style，
give the name， be made into any shape， be made with gold and jewels， in fact， as a gift of， in return，
be made to be a gift， serve as， add more details to...，
the search for， be made for， one of the great wonders，
art objects， look much like, at war，
remove... from.， remain a mystery， be ready for…
Step 4 Consolidation
Go over the key words with the students and write them on the blackboard. Give students 3 minutes to prepare and then ask some to retell the story of the Amber Room to the class.
Step 5 Closing down by having a discussion
Raise the following questions and discuss them with the students.
Can you imagine the fate of the Amber Room? What is it?
Do you think if it is worthwhile to reproduce the Amber Room? Why?
Step 6 Homework
1. Learn the useful new words and expressions in this part by heart.
2. Read the text again and try to talk about the history of the Amber Room.
The 2nd Period
Unit 1 Contents Reading Comprehending & Learning about language
Teaching Aims Knowledge Vocabulary words rare，valuable，survive，vase，dynasty，amaze，select，honey，design，fancy，style，decorate，jewel， artist，belong，troop，reception，remove，wooden，doubt，former，worth
phrases in search of，belong to，in return，at war，less than
1. Get students to learn and grasp the important useful new words and expressions in this part
2. Let students learn some important and useful sentence patterns
Ability 1. Get students to use some useful new words and expressions correctly.
2. Enable students to make sentences after the useful sentence patterns.
Emotion 1. Stimulate students' interest in learning English.
2. Develop students’ spirits of cooperation and teamwork.
Analysis
of the teaching materials Importance 1. Enable students to grasp the usages of such important new words and expressions as survive，belong，doubt，belong to，in search of，etc.
2. Get students to master the patterns：“Sadly，although the Amber Room was considered one of the wonders of the world，it is now missing，and“There is no doubt that the boxes were then put on a train for Konigsberg.. .”
Difficulties 1.Let students learn the usages of the words“belong“ and“doubt”and the expression ”belong to“.
2.Get students to understand some difficult and long sentences.
Multimedia Computer PPT CD
Teaching & Learning methods 1. Task-based Teaching & Learning
2. Cooperative learning
3. Discussion
Teaching Procedures
The 2nd Period
Learning about important language points
Step 1 Revision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Ask some students to tell the history of the Amber Room.
Step 2 Reading and finding
Get students to read through Warming Up，Pre-reading，Reading and Comprehending to underline all the new words and useful expressions or collocations in these parts.
a cultural relic，be rare. and valuable，survive for a long time，whether... or not，an amazing history，be used to do...，the design of the room，the fancy style，popular in those days，give the name，decorated with gold and jewels，in fact，as a gift of...，in return，be made to be a gift，serve as，add more details to，the search for，be made for， one of the wonders，art objects，look much like...，at war，remove... from...，remain a mystery，be ready for.
Read them aloud and copy them down in the exercise book after class.
Step 3 Practice for useful words and expressions
1. Turn to page 3. Go through the exercises in Discovering useful words and expressions with students and make sure they know what to do.
2. Give them several minutes to finish the exercises. They first do them individually，and then discuss and check them with their partners.
3. Check the answers with the whole class and explain the problems they meet where necessary.
Step 4 Vocabulary study
1. survive vt. & vi。
1）vi. continue to live or exist继续生存或存在
Few survived after the flood. 洪水后生还者极少。
The custom still survives. 这种风俗习惯还保存着。
2）vt. continue to live or exist in spite of nearly being killed or destroyed
幸存；幸免于
He survived the shipwreck. 在这次船只沉没事件中他幸免于难。
The plants may not survive the frost. 这些植物不经冻。
The house survived the storm. 经过暴风雨袭击，这所房屋并未倒塌。
3）vt. remain alive after sb.比某人长命
He survived his wife for many years. 他比妻子多活好多年。
【拓展】
survivor，person or thing that has survived幸存者；逃生者；残存物
survival n. 1）state of continuing to live or exist幸存；残存；生存
2) person, thing, custom，belief, etc. that has survived from an earlier time 遗老；遗习；旧风俗；旧思想
2. belong to: be the property of; be a member of 属于；是…的成员
The land belongs legally to the government. 该地依法属政府所有。
The blue sky belongs equally to us all. 蓝天为我们所共有。
They belonged to a younger generation. 他们属于年轻的一代。
【注意】
belong to不用于被动语态，也不用于进行时态。例如：
这本书现在属于我。
正：This book belongs to me.
误：This book is belonged to me.
误：This book is belonging to me.
3. in return: as payment or a reward for sth. 作为对某事的酬谢或回报
I bought him a drink in return for his help.我请他喝酒以酬谢他的帮助。
He presented her a notebook in return. 他回赠给她一本笔记本。
4. doubt n. & v．uncertainty or disbelief; reason for not believing sth.
怀疑；不确定；不信任；不相信
There is not much doubt about it. 这没什么可怀疑的。
I have doubts about his competence. 我对他的能力有很大怀疑。
He has his doubt to this being true. 他怀疑这件事是否属实。
Please dismiss all doubts about it. 怀疑是人的天性。
I do not doubt of your success. 我不怀疑你的成功。
I doubt whether/if he is at home. 我看他不一定在家.
I do not doubt that he can recite it. 我相信他能把它背下来。
Can you doubt that he will win? 你不相信他会获胜吗？
I doubt what he said. 我不相信他说的话。
5．remain vi. usually not used the continuous tenses通常不用于进行时态
1）be left or still present after other parts have been removed or used or dealt with剩下；剩余）
After the fire,very little remained of my house. 火灾过后，寒舍所剩无几。
If you take 3 from 8，5 remains. 8减3剩5。
2）be left to be seen, done, said, etc. 留待以后去看、去做、去说等
It remains to be seen whether you are right. 你是否正确，以后可见分晓。
Much remains to be done. 要做的事情还很多。．
3) stay in the same place;stay behind停留，逗留；留下
I remained in London until May. 我在伦教一直待到五月．
She left，but I remained（behind)． 她走了，我没走。
4) continue to be；stay in the same condition仍然是；保持不变
We should remain modest and prudent. 我们应该保持谦虚谨慎。
Let things remain as they are. 保持现状吧．
【辨析]remain＆stay
remain和stay都指“继续停留”或“继续保持某种状态、关系或行动”，二者常可互换。
remain强询“继续停留于一处或保持原状态，情况性质不改变”。例如：
This place remains cool all summer. 这个地方整个夏天都凉爽。
stay强调“某人或某物继续留在原地而不离开”。例如：
He stayed to see the end of the game. 他一直待到比赛结束。
Step 5 Sentence focus
1. This gift was the Amber Room，which was given this name because several tons of amber were used to make it.
这件礼物就是唬拍屋，它之所以有这个名字；是因为造这间房子用了好几吨珑拍．
这是一个复合句，句中which was given this name because several tons of amber were used to make it为非限制性定语从句，从句中又含有原因状语从句because several tons of amber were used to make it。
非限制性定语从句，修饰物时用which, whose；修饰人时用who, whom, whose。非限制性定语从句和它的先行词之间只是松散的关系，往往是对先行词作补充说明，这种从句在朗读时有停顿，在文字中通常有逗号与主句隔开。例如：
The chairman，who spoke first，sat on my right.
主席坐在我的右边，他最先发言。
The speech，which bored everyone，went on and on.
那演讲一直在进行，大家都觉得厌烦。
关系副词where和when也能引导非限制性定语从句。例如：
On April 1 they flew to Beijing，where they stayed several days.
4月1日他们飞到北京，在那里待了几天。
I'm seeing the manager tomorrow，when he will be back from New York.
我明天要去见经理，他明天从纽约回来。
另外，由which引导的非限制性定语从句，有时候修饰整个句子或句子中的某个部分。例如：
They have invited us to visit their country，which is very kind of them.
他们非常友好地邀请我们去访问他们的国家。
They usually take a walk after supper，which does them a lot of good.
他们通常晚饭后去散步，这么做对他们很有好处。
2. The design of the room was in the fancy style popular in those days.
屋子的设计是当时流行的极富艺术表现力的建筑式样。
这是一个“主系表”结构的句子,in the fancy style...在句子中用作表语，注意介词in的用法，此处表示“以……方式，以……式样，以……风格”。类似用法有in a different way等。
popular in those days是形容词短语修饰the fancy style,形容词词组作定语时，通常都作后置定语。例如：
They have a house larger than yours. 他们的房子比你的大．
The boys easiest to teach are in my class. 我班上的男生最好教了。
嵌这类后置的定语在意义上相当于定语从句。例如：
a house larger than yours= a house which is larger than yours
the boys easiest to teach＝the boys who are easiest to teach
3. In 1770 the room was completed the way she wanted.
1770年，这间唬拍屋按照她的要求完成了。
句子中的the way she wanted作状语，表示方式。此句实际为the room was
completed the way she wanted it to be completed, the way表示“方式；方法”，在定语从句中作状语时，后面的从句的引导词常常用that或in which或省略。例如：
I was never allowed to do things the way I wanted.
我从来就不被允许按照自己的想法去做事情。
We have to make it work in the way（that/in which) they want it to.
我们必须按照他们的想法把事情办好。（此句中way在从句中作状语）
He was looking at her in the way that surprised her.
他看着她的样子让她很惊讶。（注意此句中that可用which替换way在定语从句中作主语）
4. There is no doubt that the boxes were then put on a train for Konigsberg，which was at that time a German city on the Baltic Sea.
毫无疑间，这些箱子后来被装上火车运往哥尼斯堡，当时它是波罗的海边的一个德国城市。
这是一个复合句,that the boxes were then put on a train for Konigsberg是同位语从句，表示与之同位的doubt的实际内容。which was at that time a German city on the Baltic Sea是Konigsberg的非限制性定语从句，先行词为Konigsbergo
同位语从句常用that来引导，但随着与其同位的名词不同，也可由when, where,whether, how等来引导。例如：
They had to face the fact that the nearest filling station is thirty kilometers away. 他们不得不面对这样一个现实：最近的加油站还在30千米外。
The doctors came to the conclusion that the patient was suffering from cancer. 医生们作出了诊断结果：病人身患癌症。
I have no idea when he will return.我不知道他何时回来。
* There is no doubt that...可作为固定句型来用，意思是“毫无疑间……”。例如：
There is no doubt that he is a fine scholar.
毫无疑问他是一位优秀的学者。
There is no doubt that you can find a way to solve this problem.
毫无疑问你能找到解决这个问题的办法．
Step 6 Using words and expressions
Turn to page 42. Ask students to do the exercises in Using words and expressions in the Workbook. The following procedures may be followed：
1. Go through the two exercises with students and make sure they know what to do.
2. Several minutes for students to finish them individually.
3. Check the answers with the whole class.
Step 7 Homework
1. Finish off the Workbook exercises. Do Exercise 3 in your exercise book.
2. Learn the useful new words and expressions by heart.
The 3rd Period
Unit 1 Contents Learning about language
Teaching Aims Knowledge Vocabulary words local
phrases
1.Get students to know the structures of the restrictive and non-restrictive attributive clauses.
2. Let students learn the usages of the restrictive and non-restrictive attributive clauses.
Ability Enable students to use the restrictive and non-restrictive attributive clauses correctly and properly.
Emotion l. Get Ss to become interested in grammar learning.
2. Develop Ss' sense of group cooperation.
Analysis
of the teaching materials Importance 1. Get students to master the structures and usages of the restrictive and non-restrictive attributive clauses.
2. Let students know the differences between the restrictive attributive clause and non-restrictive attributive clause.
Difficulties Enable students to learn how to use the restrictive and non-restrictive attributive clauses correctly.
Multimedia Computer PPT
Teaching & Learning methods 1. Task-based Teaching & Learning
2. Cooperative learning & Practice
Teaching Procedures
Step 1 Revision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Dictate some important sentences in the passage In Search o f the Amber Room．
Step 2 Grammar revision
Ask students to review relative pronouns and relative adverbs and then do some related exercises.
Step 3 Learning about grammar
1. Let students pick out the sentences that use the attributive clauses from Warming up，Pre-reading and Reading，read them aloud and then translate them into English.
2. Ask students to study these sentences，and compare the sentence“This gift was he Amber Room，which was given this name because almost several tons of amber were used to make it with the others. Let them try to find the difference.
3. Sum up：Restrictive ＆ non-restrictive clauses.
Do the following pair of sentences mean the same thing?
My uncle，who lives in London，is very rich.
My uncle who lives in London is very rich.
The first sentence has a non-restrictive clause within two commas，and the second has a restrictive clause. A non-restrictive clause simply adds more information into the sentence and does not affect the meaning of the main clause；it is therefore bracketed off with commas. Conversely，a restrictive clause defines its referent in the main clause more specifically and contributes significantly to the meaning of the sentence.
Step 4 Grammar practice
1. Let students finish Exercise 3 and Exercise 4 in Discovering useful structures on page 4 and exercises in Using Structures on page 43.
2. Check the answers with the whole class，and see how well the students did.
Step 5 Additional exercises
Provide some exercises for students to test whether they have grasped the restrictive & non-restrictive attributive clauses.
Step 6 Homework
1. Finish off the workbook exercises. Do the exercises in Using Structures in your exercise book.
2. Preview the next part Using language.
The 4th Period
Unit 1 Contents Using language: Reading & Talking
Teaching Aims Knowledge Vocabulary words trial，consider，opinion，evidence，prove，pretend
phrases more than，even though
1. Get students to learn some useful new words and expressions in this part
2. Let students know what a fact is，what an opinion is and the difference between them.
Ability 1. Develop students’reading skills by extensive reading and enable them to learn how to use different reading skills to read different reading materials.
2. Train students’ speaking ability and enable them to tell the difference between facts and opinions and talk about something which interests them and about something which they are familiar with.
Emotion 1. Enable students to learn from Feng Jicai and protect cultural relics in their home town or city.
2. Develop students' sense of group cooperation and teamwork.
Analysis
of the teaching materials Importance 1. Develop students’reading skills by extensive reading.
2. Train students' speaking ability by telling the difference between fact and opinion and talking about something which interests them and about which they are familiar with.
Difficulties 1. Enable students to learn to use reading strategies such as skimming and scanning.
2. Get Ss tolearn how to tell facts from opinions.
Multimedia Computer PPT
Teaching & Learning methods 1. Task-based Teaching & Learning
2. Cooperative learning & Practice
3. Discussing
Teaching Procedures
The 4th Period
Step 1 Revision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Ask students to translate some sentences using the attributive clause.
Step 2 Warming up by discussing
Tell students：We are going to read a passage about fact，opinion and evidence. Before reading it，let`s discuss the following questions.
1. If you want to go in for law against somebody，and if you want to win，what`s the most important thing, you should do first？
2. What makes a judge decide which eyewitnesses to believe and which not to believe?
Step 3 Reading
1. Ask students to turn to page 5．
2. Two minutes for students to read the passage fast and try to get the main idea.
3. Four minutes for students to read the passage again and answer the questions.
What is a fact?
What is an opinion?
What is evidence？
4. Ask students to listen to the tape and read the passage aloud.
5. Photocopy a brief newspaper article，preferably one which talks about. a crime trial. Then have students pick out the facts and opinions and give reasons for their answers.
Step 4 Talking
1. Ask students to turn to page 41 and make a dialogue giving facts and opinions.
2. Let them check and practice the dialogue in pairs and then give a performance for the class.
Step 5 Reading task
1. Show students Feng Jicai`s photo and one of his novels and talk about them.
2. Ask students to turn to page 45，read the passage Big Feng to the Rescue to try to find the best summary and answer these questions.
3. Let students discuss：How can we do to help Feng Jicai with his projects?
Step 6 Summing up
Ask students to choose one of the following to prepare and then report to the class.
1. Tell the differences between facts and opinions.
2. Tell something about how Feng Jicai protected the cultural relics of his hometown.
3. Talk about something which interests you in your own life.
Step 7 Homework
1. Finish off the Workbook exercises.
2. Read the two passages again and try to grasp the main idea of them.
The 5th Period
Unit 1 Contents Using language: listening & speaking
Teaching Aims Knowledge 1. Get students to learn some useful new words and expressions in this unit.
2. Let students learn the expressions of asking for opinions and giving opinions.
Are you sure he/she was telling the truth? How do you know that?
How can you be sure he/she was telling the truth?
Why/Why not？
I don't believe...，because...
That can't be true. It is（not) a fact.
I (don't) agree with you. I don't agree that..，
It can be proved. The truth is (not) easy to know.
I think they have said useful things.…has no reason to lie.
Ability 1. Enable students to catch and understand the listening materials.
2. Develop students’ability to get special information and take notes while listening.
3. Get students to learn how to ask for opinions and give opinions.
4. Let students write a short report.
Emotion 1. Enable students to know more about cultural relics and stimulate their sense of protecting cultural relics.
2. Develop students’sense of group cooperation and teamwork.
Analysis
of the teaching materials Importance 1. Develop students' listening and speaking abilities.
2. Enable students to master different listening skills.
3. Let the students learn how to ask for opinions and give opinions.
Difficulties 1. Get students to listen and understand different listening materials.
2. Develop students’speaking ability.
Multimedia Computer PPT
Teaching & Learning methods 1. Task-based Teaching & Learning
2. Cooperative learning
3. Discussing
Teaching Procedures
The 5th Period
Step 1 Revision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Ask some students to talk about facts，opinions and evidence.
Step 2 Warming up by talking
Ask students to talk about the story of the Amber Room and its fate. Tell the students：
No one knows exactly what happened to the Amber Room. A few people say that they were eyewitnesses who saw where the Amber Room was hidden. Listen to their stories. .-
Step 3 Listening on pages 5-6
Turn to page 6．Ask students to look at the two forms and listen to the tape，take notes of what they hear and fill in the forms.
Step 4 Speaking on page 6
Turn to page 6．Ask students to share their forms with a partner，discuss together which person gave the best evidence，write down a short list of reasons for their choice and then give a short report about their list to the class.
Step 5 Listening on page 41
Ask students to turn to page 41，look at the picture and talk about the Aswan Dam and Abu Simbel temple. Let them listen to the tape and answer the questions and then check the answers with the class.
Step 6 Listening task on page 44
1. Ask students to look at the picture on page 44 and describe it. Then play the tape for students to listen to and get the main idea of the listening text.
2. Let students listen again and fill in the chart with details.
3. Ask students to listen to the tape a third time and try to get the right answers.
Step 7 Consolidation
Show students the three listening texts，let them read the texts aloud and then retell them.
Step 8 Homework
1. Finish off the Workbook exercises.
2. Read the listening texts again and try to retell them.
The 6th Period
Unit 1 Contents Using language: Reading & speaking
Teaching Aims Knowledge Vocabulary words treasure，besides
phrases search for，think highly of
1. 1. Get students to learn and master the new words and useful expressions：
2. Let students know the form of an English letter.
Ability 1. Develop students’writing ability by writing letters.
2. Enable students to express agreement and disagreement.
3. Enable students to express good reasoning and strong feelings.
Emotion 1. Stimulate students’sense of cultural relic's protection and encourage them to persuade others to protect cultural relics.
2. Enable students to master writing skills and write excellent letters.
Analysis
of the teaching materials Importance 1. Develop students’writing ability.
2. Get students to use the expressions of expressing agreement and disagreement，and reasoning.
Difficulties 1. Get students to learn to express good reasoning and strong feelings.
2. Let students learn how to write a persuasive letter.
Multimedia Computer PPT
Teaching & Learning methods 1. Task-based Teaching & Learning
2. Cooperative learning
3. Discussing
Teaching Procedures
The 6th Period
Step 1 Revision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Ask students to dictate the new words and expressions：treasure，besides，think highly of，tell the truth，etc.
Step 2 Warming up
Ask students to talk about cultural relics found in their daily life. Ask them what they would do if they found a rare cultural relic.
Step 3 Reading
Let students read the letter and answer some questions according to the letter.
Step 4 Writing
Ask students to have a class debate and write a report on their debate.
Step 5 Writing task
Suppose there is one cultural relic in your hometown that is worth saving or protecting. Write a letter to all the students of your school to encourage them to help save the cultural relic.
1. Let students read the outline as a guide.
2. Give 10 minutes to them to write the letter.
3. Ask as many students as possible to read their letters to the class.
Step 6 Homework
1. Finish off the Workbook exercises.
2. Write the two letters in your exercise book.
篇9：Phrases for unit 1 Module 1 (新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)
Phrases for unit 1 Module 1
Unit 1 School life 35.the best way to do / of doing sth
1.tell the differences between…and 36.achieve high grades/ success
2.know of / about sb/sth 37.a bit challenge
3.(be) at ease with 38.at first
4.be happy with sb / sth 39.spend… (in) doing
5.on (the ) average 40.at the end of this month
6.used to do sth 41.miss doing
7.be used to doing sth 42.as well (as )
8.for free 43.word by word
9.such as 44.at the beginning of …
10.encourage sb to do sth 45.according to…
11.introduce A to B 46.first of all
12.pass sth on (to ) sb. 47.do like eating desserts
13.be available for 48.think of
14.(be) far ( away) from 49.learn about
15.make sure that…. 50.the quickest way to get to the canteen
16.graduate from 51.go straight on
17.upon/on doing 52.be late for…
18.surf the internet 53.get/be/become interested in
19.donate sth to sb 54.develop an interest in
20.forget to do sth 55.miss the chance to do sth
21.forget doing sth 56.instead of (doing) sth
22.inform sb of sth 57.pay attention to
23.prepare for 58.as… as possible
24.make preparations for 59.finish doing
25.in preparation for 60.compare …with
26.do… for preparation 61.regret to do
27.be responsible for 62.regret doing
28.be made up of 63.songs sung by the students
29.consist of 64.stop to do / doing
30.come up with 65.read …out aloud
31.mean to do 66.have something done
32.mean doing
33.than usual / as usual
34.attend assembly
Unit 2 Module 1
36.keep … in mind
1.turn up 37.get … tidied up
2.force sb to do sth 38.clean …up
3.an unpleasant experience 39.either…or
4.can’t wait to do… 40.not…. at all
5. be supposed to do 41.ask for sth
6.be gong/ missing /lost 42.at the moment
7.do with… 43.refuse to do …
8. deal with 44.insist on doing
9.leave sb in charge 45. be to do …
10. be in charge of 46.at present
11.act like an adult 47.prevent doing
12.expect sth from sb 48. prevent … from doing
13.go unpunished 49.allow sb to do…
14.go out 50.keep doing
15.have sth done 51.help …with
16.not … any more 52.shout at
17.deserve to do 53.like crazy
18.be hard on… 54.every time
19.be rude to … 55 forbid …from doing
20.be different from… 56. search for
21. than ever (before ) 57.waste .. doing
22.make sb do 58.invite sb to do…
23.even if 59.now that…
24.without being punished 60.feel like doing
25. should have done 61.in the form of…
26.explain to sb sth/ that… 62.suggest doing
27.on one’s holiday / vocation
28.argue about sth with sb
29. a little bit expensive
30. be proud of
31.stay up
32.after all
33.mix…up with…
34.in fact
35.keep doing
Unit 3 Module 1
1.by doing …
2.keep sb doing…
3.cause sb to do ….
4.hear from
5.for weeks
6.three times a week
7.work out
8.stay slim
9.be ashamed of…
10.lose weight
11.keep doing
12.regret doing
13.follow sb’s advice
14.be amazed about
15.go on diets
16.learn from
17.in secret
18.keep fit
19.side effect
20.unlike what Jeff said
21.by the way
22. join sb in sth
23.help do …
24.be surprised to do…
25.prepare sb for…
26. as a matter of fact
27.in no time
28.along with
29.come cross
30.in the long term
31.give out
32.be dying for sth/ to do sth
Unit 1 Module 2
page 1 Page 7.
1. a sunken ship 31. dream of
2,run into 32.come true
3. reason for building the pyramids 33 separate…from…
4. believe in 34..take off
page 2 Page 11
5.step up 35.so far
6. search for 36.get…done
7.go missing page 18---19
9.due to 37.be said to be hairy
10.because of 38.run after
11.stay out late 39.on average
12.show up=turn up 40.footprints made by men
13.the next day /next day 41.cause ...to do
14.in fact 42.could have done
15. did return home 43.become convinced
16.see/hear/… doing/do 44.make one’s way to…
17.go straight home 45.have the chance to …
18.put on Sentences’ structures:
19.according to… 1.Mr Foster was surprised that his son did not
20.outside the window tell anyone that he was staying out late.
Page 3 2. However, police found that Justin did in fact
21.full moon return home on Friday night .
22. strange looking creatures with large black eyes 3.Witnesses also say they saw Justin walking towards his home at 10.45 p.m.
23.so that/ so …that…
24.do research on
25.rule out
26.look into
27.make up
28.take charge of=be in charge of/ in the charge of
29.look at…
30.give up
Unit 2 Module 2
p 22 -23 an animal to sit on make a fire
be busy doing… lose one’s way
spend… (in) doing run out
be ready to do… a piece of equipment
on camels/ by camel when needed
be the size of … P 28 over a period of time
sleeping bags p 31 be disappointed at…
so that (conj) in total silence
on clear nights (prep) at dawn
in the dark (prep) p33 look out for …
in case (conj.) at the foot of…
in case of …(prep) p35 up to $ 2,000
in that case (prep) in total
turn upside down P 38
get turned join together
including cows’ blood reach to the sky
close to…. stay young
as …as possible be covered with…
worry about…. feed on…
refer to…. in harmony with
p 25 can’t wait to do… provide …with…
sound like…
look forward to doing…
be worth doing…
P 27 as well
1. I’ll bring a torch with me so that I’ll be able to see in the dark.
2. You have to wear special clothing just in case your raft gets turned upside down or sinks.
3. We’ll try to get as close as possible to the animals, even though they’re dangerous.
4. The weather report says that it will be raining when we arrive in London.
5. As you can see, my schedule for June is full and I cannot go to London for the festival.
6. Lakes , surrounded by vast grasslands, look like jewels.
Unit 3 Module 2
p 41 within seven years
of all time have something/nothing to do with…
have an effect on… at the age of
p42 result in/ result from
during one’s lifetime in advance
teach sb to do … based on…/ base…on
be curious about p 45
at the age of … pay off/ back/for…
set sail (for….) make a great contribution to…
search for later on
be known as… p50
a city called Luxor set foot on…
as well as /as well at full speed
by the 1920s pay (little/ much ) attention to…
right away P58
upon doing… in orbit
fall ill not only….but also
lead …to / lead to win somebody something
P45 in control
fall ill with a fever be proud of
at the moment of… look up to …
hear of… manage to do...
the following day
die of…
shortly after….
Sentences :
p42.By the time we left, it was empty.
Upon entering the tomb, Carter’s lucky pet bird was eaten by a snake.
p43 If breathed in, the viruses can result in illness or even death.
What is certain, though, is that the mystery of Tutankhamun’s tomb has never been fully explained.
P58 Born in 1965, Yang Liwei has wanted to fly since he was young boy.
The team spent the next five years being trained.
It was his high scores on the psychological tests that finally won him his position as China’s first astronaut.
Unit 3 Module 3
be known as
take over
continue to do…
turn to …
be covered with/by
a pair of binoculars
be off to …
by the time…
together with….
prevent …from….
be involved in…
brush away
prepare oneself to do…
in good condition
carry out
lead to…
on board
in memory of….
be in use
in return for….
once again
no more
in the following hundred years
arrange for…
go on a cultural expedition to….
run through
refer to….
pay attention to…
have the chance to do/ of doing….
throughout the world
focus on….
in history
Unit 1 Module 3
page 2-3 that far lose sight of…
glance at continue doing
in sight sweat with fear
set off all of a sudden
by the time ring out
feel a rough hand brush her face page 16---17 work out a plan
feel here heart beating with fear be used to do …
wish for according to…
hold her still a chair to sit on
reach out ( for …) fall asleep
stare (up) at look up (at …)
rest on … bang into
watch out (for…) in a beautiful dress
be off offer sb sth
a fog this bad page 18 mainly because
pay back the chance of being attacked by a shark
get across the road feed on..
except in a fog like this be known as
have … in common find out
page 5 follow one’s advice be fit to do…
weather that bad the latter type of attacks
be frozen with be likely to do…
believe in over a long distance
page 6 go hungry be attracted to sth
page 9 be related to… the following tips
be linked to… hit… on the nose
a question to be answered stick sb in the eye
page 11 have something/nothing to do with..
overall health as well sign language even if
make the most of at lunchtime sleep deeply manage to do..
rather than +V in the distance be grateful to…
make one’s way to… in the near future
can’t help doing/do 名词性从句：主语从句 宾语从句
warm ..up 表语从句 同位语从句
get close to
Unit 2 Module 3
p 22-23 throughout history due to…
so many confusing rules differ from
be made up of as a whole
a language called Celtic turn into
mix…with… combine …and/with …
be different from
consist of…
pick up
lift up
contribute to…
take control of…
despite the fact
have an impact on…
result in..
by the latter half of the 14th century
mother tongue
because of…
continue doing…
P 24 take the place of…
p 25 depend on…
p26.a lauge number /amount of…
in addition
take my concerns into consideration
have a word with…
right away
sort out
p 28-29 dream of…
come tre
look up the word
a waste of…
what if.
keep changing
disagree about sth
agree with sb
care about…
keep their language pure
Unit 1 Module 4
page 1. be aware of, be tired of…
be similar to... be available to….
Project Hope on sale
page 2 encourage sb to do.. be popular with…
be used to +N/Ving ( V) of high quality/ importance/help..
in a day p 8 the following day
do research on… the previous day
share sth with sb over and over (again)
believe in an idea p 13 consider doing
for free be attractive to sb
be intended to do… p 16 regret not having done…
protect ….from…. up to 6 hours
even if/ even though be bored with….
be proud of… Page 18
connect ….to…. get sb to do…
fall for …. be concerned with
play tricks on … care about
the public get …across
be meant to do…. depend on…
lead better lives appeal to
Knowledge changes life
deal with….
live healthy lives
Smoking is committing suicide slowly
follow the advice
be smart about….
be supposed to do…
warn...against…
page 5 offer sb sth
be satisfied with…
trick….into…
take drugs
keep away from….
persuade sb into doing….
page 6 at low price
Unit 2 Module 4
save time for 词汇拓展
in honour of honour n adj adv
from around the world delight n adj adv
come to one’s attention significance n adj
under the name of brief adj adv
recognize …as… athlete n adj adv
get sth doing marry v adj n
be designed to… compete v n adj
come up with peace n adj adv
look out for contribute v n
enter…into… absence n adj
be of great use excite v n adj
call an ambulance Asia n adj
meet the requirements move v n
(keep …)under control glory n adj
make way for attract v n adj
hope for orgin n adj adv
take part in act v adj adv n
side by side require v n
break the record practise v n
make contributions to associate v n
play a role in support v n
be popular with… involve v adj n
at least
plenty of
no matter wh-…
be delighted to do
look forward to doing
hope for + N
every two years
compete for…
the opening ceremony
across the world
realize one’s dream
Unit 3 Module 4
come true end in failure
virtual reality make money
not only…but aslo P 49
pass on at the moment
thousands of last but not least
be connected to on display
give out throughout the week
put forward P 51
depend on set up
last but the not least concertrate on
set up be bored with
be accused of…. accuse …of be disappointed at /by
close down be impressed at/by/with
concentrate on be situated in/ on
in my opinion be surprised at/by
come across P 53
instead of at one time
P 42---43 in my opinion
pass on in worse condition
be connected to P 59
thousands of come across
give out tell of…
add to… recognize …as
upon doing… at a speed of…
not only …but also with the help of….
provide …with…
play the role of ….
put forward
in reality
bring…alive
P 45
take the risk of….
P 46
make a profit
篇10：Unit 1 Cultural relics (新课标版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
Unit 1 Cultural relics
Period 1: Words and expressions from Unit I Cultural Relics
cultural
adj. 文化的 a cultural independence / cultural exchange
relic
n. sth. old that reminds us of the past遗迹；古物 unearthed cultural / a relic of early civilization
survive
vt.&vi. to continue to live, esp. after coming close to death; to continue to live after…幸免于；幸存；……之后还活着 survive the traffic accident / survive all her children
remain
vi. 1. to stay or be left behind after others have gone or been removed停留；留居；留下When the others had gone, Mary remained and put back the furniture.2. to continue to be( in an unchanged state)继续；依然remain young / remain to be uncompleted; Peter became a judge but John remained a fisherman. If you won’t eat you’ll just have to remain hungry! 3. It remains to be seen: we shall know later on.情况仍未明，要看怎样发展。
state
n. 国家；政府；州；状态 state schools / state documents /in a poor state of health
look into: to examine the meaning or causes of考察，调查 look into the matter / look into the event
rare
adj. 稀罕的；稀有的；珍贵的 the rare air of the mountains / rare metals / a rare book
dynasty
n. 朝代；王朝 the Qing Dynasty / the Tudor dynasty in England
belong to
to be the property of; to be a member of; to be connected with属于；为……的一员;与……有关系belong to a club / belong to a class / belong to me
in search of 寻找 in search of the cure to the disease / in search of the lost boy
amber
n. adj. 琥珀；琥珀制的；琥珀色的 the amber traffic lights / a decoration of amber
gift
n. 赠品；礼物；天赋 birthday gifts / gift vouchers / a gift for music
melt
vt. vi. (使)融化；（使）熔化 melt the snow / melt the anger /melt in water
heat
n. vt. 热；热度；把……加热；使激动 the body heat/ the heat of a debate/ heat soup for lunch
design
n. a plan in the mind; a drawing or pattern showing how sth. is to be made设计；图案 vt. to imagine and plan out in the mind设计；构思 curious in design / make a design for a monument; design an engine / design dresses for a queen
fancy
adj.奇特的；异样的（无最高级和比较级）vt.想象；设想；爱好 a fancy price / fancy goods / fancy his coming /fancy herself still young
style
n.风格；风度；类型 do things in style / in the style of / out of style.
jewel
n.珠宝；宝石 precious jewels / a jewel necklace
in return(for): in exchange (for); in payment (for)作为交换；报答；酬谢 in return for her kindness / in return for his gilt
light
vt. vi 点火，照亮 light a cigarette / light a torch/ light sb. on his way
mirror
n. 镜子；反映 a driving mirror / look in the mirror/ a mirror of the times
wonder
n. 奇迹；惊奇 the wonders of nature/ It’s no wonder. /in wonder
at war 处于交战状态 be at war / have been at war for long
remove
vt. to take away(from a place); take off移动;脱掉；除去remove the cloth from the table / remove one’s hat; You’ve got to remove your shoes before you enter the room.
furniture
n.家具（总称）much furniture / a lot of furniture /a set of furniture/ a piece of furniture
secretly
adv.秘密地；背地里 have a talk secretly/ take an action secretly
wooden
adj. 木制的 a wooden bridge/ a wooden chair
doubt
n. 怀疑；疑惑；vt.怀疑；不信 there is no doubt about sb./ sth./ no doubt/ …not doubt that / …doubt whether
mystery
n.神秘；神秘的事物 make a mystery of matter / dive into the mysteries of
apart
adv. 分离；分别地 miles apart / stand apart / keep apart from take apart 拆开 take apart the machine / take sb. apart
trial
n.审判；审问；试验 hold a trial / trial by a military court / give sb. a trial
consider
vt.1. to think about; examine考虑；思考I’m considering changing my job. We’ve decided to move and are considering a new house in Beijing. 2. to regard as认为I consider you a fool. I consider it a great honour to be here with you today. The boss considered Tom (to be) too lazy to be a good worker. 3. to take into account顾及；考虑到；If you consider (the fact) that she’s only been studying English a year, she speaks it very well.
opinion n.意见；看法；判断 give one’s opinion / in one’s opinion / depend on one’s opinion
evidence n.根据；证据；证物 evidence for his guilt/ call sb. for evidence/ material evidence/ verbal evidence
prove vt. 证明；证实 vi. 原来是；证明是 prove its truth / prove sb to be / be proved to be
pretend vt.假装；装扮 pretend to be / pretend that
think highly of 看重；器重 think highly of his deeds / think highly of his character
treasure n.财宝；财富；珍品 a store of hidden treasure / collect many treasures
besides adv. in addition, also此外;而且I don’t want to go; besides, I’m tired. I met some friends and other people besides. I don’t like those blue socks; what have you got besides? prep. as well as; in addition to除……之外 I have a few friends besides you. There were three others present at the meeting besides Mr. Day.
Period 2: A sample lesson plan for Reading
(IN SEARCH OF THE AMBER ROOM)
Aims：
To read about cultural relics
To learn about The Restrictive and Non-Restrictive Attributive Clause
I. Warming up
Warming up by defining
Good morning, class. This period we are going to read about IN SEARCH OF THE AMBER ROOM. Before our reading, I’d like to know:
A. What kind of old things are cultural relics?
B. Are all the old things cultural relics?
C. What is the definition and classification of cultural relics?
D. To whom do cultural relics belong?
Keys for reference:
A. Cultural relics are physical remainders of what different peoples valued in the past and continue to value now. It can also be said that cultural relics are more than works of art, they are symbols of history and the people who lived in the past.
B. No, not all the old objects are cultural relics.
C. Each kind of relics preserves some aspect of cultural heritage and each relic is still a unique cultural expression and contributions.
D. In a larger sense, it can be said that all the cultural relics belong to all peoples and whole societies, not a certain individual.
Warming up by presenting
Hi, everyone. Let’s look at the screen. I’ll present you some pictures. They all belong to cultural relics. Some of them are cultural sites. Some of them are natural sites. Please think these over：
A. Can you name them out?
B. Who have the right to confirm and classify them?
Keys for reference:
A. They are cultural sites: The Great wall; The Imperial Palace of the Ming and Qing Dynasties in Beijing and Shenyang; The Mausoleum of the First Qin Emperor and the Terracotta Warriors; The Mogao Cave. These are natural sites: The Jiu Zhai Gou Valley Scenic and Historic Interest Area; The Huang Long Scenic and Histioric Interest Area. The following are cultural and natural sites: Mount Taishan; Mount Huangshan; Mount WuYi.
B. Only an international professional organization from UN has the authority to confirm and classify them.
Warming up by discussing
Now, boys and girls, I met a “moral dilemma”. That means I must make a choice between the interests of the family and the interests of the society. Things are like this: My old granny happened to find an ancient vase under the tree in the earth of our garden. It’s so beautiful and special. Now, my family fell into a moral dilemma. Can you help us to make a decision:
A: What should we do?
B: Can we keep it for ourselves or report it to the government?
C: Have you come across such a situation - to make a difficult choice?
Keys: ABC questions can be answered in all kinds of ways. The answers are flexible.
II. Pre-reading
1. Looking and saying
Work in pairs. Look at the photos on the screen. All these relics are quite beautiful. But some of them were lost and ruined in history，such as Yuan MingYuan and the Amber Room. Please guess:
A. What kinds of things can result in their disappearing?
B. Why do they come into being once again?
Keys for reference:
A. Maybe wars, natural disasters, and time have damaged or destroyed them, getting them lost and changed. Many of them were even stolen and hidden while nobody knows who, where and how.
B. People get to know these. If these relics could not be found again, they would be rebuilt by people.
2. Explaining and sharing
Work in groups of four. Tell your group mates:
A. What do you know about the substance of “amber”?
B. What do you know about the cultural relics “the Amber Room”?
Keys for reference:
I am from group 2. From the knowledge we got from biology and chemistry, we know “amber” is a semi-precious stone used in jewelry and art world. Amber is really the fossil form of resin from trees. It has got its shape after a process that has taken millions of years to complete. Trees in very ancient forests produced this resin, which slowly dropped from trees and was buried. Trees use resin to protect themselves from disease and harm caused by insects and fungi.
I am from group 6. From the information of history legends and news reports, we know the Amber Room is a room built by lots of ambers. It was a gift given to Peter the Great, the King of Russia, by the King of Prussia, Frederick William I. It was given the name because almost thousand tons of natural ambers were used to make it. But during the second world war in 1941, the Nazi German army secretly stole the Amber Room and sent boxes of the Amber Room on a train to a German city. After that, what really happened to the Amber Room remains a mystery.
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text IN SEARCH OF THE AMBER ROOM. Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence. I will play the tape twice and you shall read aloud twice, too.
2. Skimming and identifying the general idea of each paragraph
Now please skim the text to get the key words and general idea of each paragraph.
1st paragraph the introduction about the Amber Room: design, colour, shape, material
2nd paragraph the present to the Czar: a part of winter palace in St. Petersburg, a reception hall for important visitor
3rd Paragraph the relocating of the Amber Room in Catherir Ⅱ times: moved into Summer Palace, more added to its design
4th Paragraph the missing of the Amber Room: the two countries were at war, Nazi German army stole the Amber Room, 27 wooden boxes were trained to a German city, Nobody knew it from then on
5th Paragraph the rebuilding of the Amber Room: a new one but the same as the old built by the two countries, for celebrating the 300th birthday of Peterburg
3.Scanning and analyzing the characteristics of the text.
Since you have got to know the general ideas of each paragraph, can you tell me the characteristics of the passage, such as, the type of writing, the way of narrating, and the tense?
Keys for reference:
This piece of passage is a narrative prose or non-fiction article written in a narrating style. It tells the history of Amber Room in the order of time so that we can clearly learn about what happened to it. The tense used in the text is past tense.
4.Reading and understanding
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from IN SEARCH OF THE AMBER ROOM
look into…, be used to…, make the design for the room, in fact, as a gift of…, add more details to…, remove… from the search for…,belong to…, feel as hard as stone, the fancy style, be made for…, in return, one of the great wonders, art objects, look much like…, give the name, be made into any shape, be made with gold and jewels, be made to be a gift, serve as…, at war, remain a mystery, be ready for…
5. Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table, which lists all the numbers in the text.
NUMBER MEANING
1716 Frederic William gave the Amber Room to Peter the Great as a gift.
1770 Catherine Ⅱ had completed the adding to the Amber Room in this year.
1941 The Nazi German army stole the Amber Room in this year.
The rebuilding of the Amber Room was completed in this year.
7000 Tons The total weight of the ambers used to make the room.
55 The number of soldiers given to the king of Russia in return.
600 The number of the candles lighting the Amber Room.
2 The two countries: German and Russia.
2 In two days the Amber Room was removed to a German city.
100,000 The Amber Room was dismantled into 100,000 pieces
27 27 wooden boxes were used to contain the pieces of Amber Room.
300th The newly rebuilt Amber Room was ready for the 300th birthday of St Peterburg city
6.Reading and learning
Read the text and learn more about the following proper nouns. You can surf on the website after class:
Names of people Names of places
Frederick Ⅰ Prussia
Frederick William Ⅰ St.Peterburg
Peter the Great Konigsberg
Catherine Ⅱ Winter Palace
Summer Palace
Ⅳ Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises No. 1 and No. 2.
Closing down by having a discussion
A. Can you imagine the fate of the Amber Room? What is it?
B. Do you think if it is worthwhile to reproduce the Amber Room? Why?
Keys for reference:
A. I have no idea about the fate of the Amber Room. Because anything can happen to it. Maybe it was destroyed at war in the fighting fire. You see, ambers can be melted easily. Maybe it was kept secretly by somebody who had died without telling about it to anyone else. So maybe it is lying somewhere quietly.
B. I think it is worthwhile to reproduce the Amber Room. Because it represents the culture and a period of history in St. Petersburg. It is a trace and feature surviving from a past age and serving to remind people of a lost time.
Closing down by retelling the story of the Amber Room
Well, all of us have learned the history of the Amber Room. Let’s recall some key words and expressions on the board. You are to retell the story of the Amber Room:
Colour Style Shape
owner present move to winter palace
add to more details remove to pieces
put on trains remain a mystery 300th birthday
Period 3: A lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The Restrictive and Non-Restrictive Attributive Clause)
Aims:
To learn about the restrictive and non-restrictive attributive clause
To discover some useful words and expressions
To discover some useful structures
Procedures:
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Please turn to page 3. Do exercises 1, 2, 3 and 4 first. Please check your answers against your classmates’.
Warming up by explaining
Now, class, since you’ve read the passage, could you explain to me how to use the phrase “belong to”? The word “to” here is a preposition, indicating the possession, and is always followed by nouns or pronoun. Look at Ex 3. The preposition “at” indicates a state, condition or continuous activity. So we can replace them or express them by using a present-continuous tense.
II. Learning about Attributive Clause
1. What is an adjective Clause?
An adjective clause is a dependent clause which takes the place of an adjective in another clause or phrase. Like an adjective, an adjective clause modifies a noun or pronoun, answering questions like “which?” or “what kind of?” Consider the following examples:
Adjective
the red coat
Adjective clause
the coat which I bought yesterday
Like the word “red” in the first example, the dependent clause “which I bought yesterday” in the second example modifies the noun “coat.” Note that an adjective clause usually comes after what it modifies, while an adjective usually comes before.
In formal writing, an adjective clause begins with the relative pronouns “who(m),” “that,” or “which.” In informal writing or speech, you may leave out the relative pronoun when it is not the subject of the adjective clause, but you should usually include the relative pronoun in formal, academic writing:
informal
The books people read were mainly religious.
formal
The books that people read were mainly religious.
informal
Some firefighters never meet the people they save.
formal
Some firefighters never meet the people whom they save.
Here are some more examples of adjective clauses:
the meat which they ate was tainted
This clause modifies the noun “meat” and answers the question “which meat?”.
They’re talking about the movie which made him cry
This clause modifies the noun “movie” and answers the question “which movie?”.
They are searching for the student who borrowed the book
The clause modifies the pronoun “student” and answers the question “which student?”.
Did I tell you about the author whom I met?
The clause modifies the noun “author” and answers the question “which author?”.
2. Restrictive & non restrictive clauses
Do the following pairs of sentences mean the same thing?
1a My uncle, who lives in London, is very rich.
2b My uncle who lives in London is very rich.
2a The policies, which were unpopular, were rejected by the voters.
2b The policies which were unpopular were rejected by the voters.
3a My niece, whose husband is out of work, will inherit the house, which I have always treasured.
3b My niece whose husband is out of work will inherit the house which I have always treasured.
The first sentence in each pair has a non-restrictive clause within two commas, and the second has a restrictive clause. A non-restrictive clause simply adds more information into the sentence and does not affect the meaning of the main clause: it is therefore bracketed off with commas (1a = an uncle who happens to live in London). Conversely, a restrictive clause defines its referent in the main clause more specifically and contributes significantly to the meaning of the sentence. Thus it is that particular uncle who lives in London who is referred to (1b). In 2a, all policies were unpopular and all were rejected, whereas in 2b only the policies that were unpopular were rejected. Note that in restrictive clauses the non-human relative pronoun is either ‘that’ or ‘which’, whereas for human referents the relative pronoun can be either ‘who/m’ or ‘that’ (the man that/whom I will marry ....).
3. A test on FORMAL ADJECTIVE CLAUSES
Directions: Combine the sentences. Use formal written English.
Use (b) as an adjective clause. Punctuate carefully.
1) (a) An antecedent is a word. (b) A pronoun refers to this word.
An antecedent ____
2) (a) The blue whale is considered the largest animal that has ever lived.(b) It can grow to 100 feet and 150 tons.
The blue whale ____
3) (a) The plane was met by a crowd of 300. (b) Some of them had been waiting for more than 4 hours.
The plane ____
4) (a) In this paper, I will describe the basic process.(b) Raw cotton becomes cotton thread by this process.
In this paper, I will describe ____
5) (a) The researchers are doing case studies of people to determine the importance of heredity in health and longevity.(b) These people’s families have a history of high blood pressure and heart disease.
The researchers are doing case studies ____
6) (a) At the end of this month, scientists at the institute will conduct their AIDS research. (b) The results of this research will be published within 6 months.
At the end of this month, scientists ____
7) (a) According to many education officials, ‘math phobia’(that is, a fear of mathematics) is a widespread problem. (b) A solution to this problem must and can be found.
According to many education officials, ‘math phobia’ ____
8) (a) The art museum hopes to hire a new administrator.
(b) Under this person’s direction it will be able to purchase significant pieces of art.
The art museum ____
9) (a) The giant anteater licks up ants for its dinner.
(b) Its tongue is longer than 30 centimeters (12 inches).
The giant anteater ____
10) (a) The anteater’s tongue is sticky.
(b) It can go in and out of its mouth 160 times a minute.
The anteater’s tongue ____
III. Closing down by taking a quiz
Quiz on Attributive clause
Select one answer from the choices provided after each sentence. The words you choose should fit the blank in the sentence. Don’t use the HINT buttons unless you really need them.
1. As many children came were given some cakes.
A. that B. as C. who D. whom
2. The visitors saw rows of houses the roofs are red.
A. on which B. of which C. where D. that
3. I usually take a nap after lunch, is my habit.
A. which it B. as it C. as D. that
4. Please tell me the way you did the job.
A. how B. where C. which D. in which
5 Is this museum some German friends visited the day before yesterday?
A. the one B. which C. that D. where
6. The farmer uses wood to build a house to store grain.
A. in which B. where C. that D. with which
7. I shall never forget the years I spent in the country with the farmers, has a great effect on my life.
A. when, which B. that, which C. when, that D. which, that
8. Little has been done is helpful to our work.
A. that B. what C. which D. all that
9. Perhaps this is the only market you can get such cheap goods.
A. that B. of which C. by which D. where
10. We’ll put off the outing until next week, __ we won’t be so busy.
A. when B. which C. at which D. in that
Key: 1~10：BBCDA ABADA
Period 4: A lesson plan for using language
Aims:
To learn to tell facts from opinions
To write a reply letter
To listen and speak about cultural relics
Procedures
I. Warming up by questions
Morning, class. We always say, “We must respect facts and can’t wholly depend on one’s opinions”. But can you tell me:
A. What does it mean when you say, “It is a fact”?
B. What does it mean when you say, “It is an opinion”?
Keys for reference:
A. A fact must be real, objective and without any personal judgment. So it can be proved.
B. An option always expresses one’s own ideas. It is always subjunctive. So it has not been proved.
Warming up by questioning
Turn to page 5. Read the passage and tell me:
A. If you want to go in for law against somebody, and if you want to win, what’s the most important thing you should do first?
B. What makes a judge decide which eyewitnesses to believe and which not to believe.
Keys for reference:
A. Searching for facts of course. The more, the better.
B. The evidences offered by the eyewitnesses make the judge decide which one is believable and which is not.
II. Guided reading
1. Reading and defining
Read the passage and define: What is a fact? What is an opinion? What is an evidence?
2. Reading and translating
Read the passage and translate it into Chinese paragraph by paragraph. Tom, you are to do paragraph 1, please…
3. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the part. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocation from Using Language on page 5
in a trial, rather than, …more than…, to tell the truth, agree with, It can be proved that …, no reason to lie, a reply to a letter, think highly of, search for, return the treasure to, cost them a lot of time and money
4. Listening
Now, boys and girls, as we know, people have never stopped searching for the Amber Room. This time we’ll listen to what three people say they know about the missing Amber Room. Before we listen to them, I’ll present some related new words to you to help you understand them easily. Please look at the screen and read after me.
explode vt. 爆炸, Czch n. 捷克, mayor n. 市长, melt vt. 熔化, sub (sub marine) n. 潜水艇，水雷, survivor n. 幸存者, Titanic n. 泰坦尼克船
5. Sharing and Correcting
Well done. Now share your forms with your partner and tell me in the three forms: What are facts? What are opinions? Li Ming, do you want a try?
Keys: What they heard, saw, did are facts. And what they believe are opinions.
6. Reviewing
We often use some expressions to ask for opinions. What are they?
Oh, yes. What do you think of …?
Do you believe …?
How can you be sure of …?
How do you know that?
And we often use some expressions to give opinions. What are they? Ok, Tom, Please. Oh, yes. They are: I think… / I don’t think… I don’t agree that… / I suppose that…
7. Discussing
Please look at exercise 3, and discuss which person gave the best evidence. Use the expressions above to help you. Before we discuss, let’s deal with the following discussion:
A. What is the best evidence?
B. How can we know which eyewitness is most believable?
Keys:
A. The best evidence is factual and is given by a person who is believable.
B. The most believable eyewitness is the one who has nothing to gain from telling a lie.
Well done. Let’s come to the discussion “Which person gave the best evidence?”
Keys fore reference:
Jan Hasek is less believable because he owns a little restaurant near the mine. If the search stopped, his business would suffer.
Hans Braun is also less believable because he is working for a company trying to find the ship which carried the treasures in the Baltic sea.
Of the three eyewitnesses, only Anna Petrov has no selfish reason for saying what she has said. In particular, she is not involved in any current effort to find the treasure. Therefore she is the most believable.
8. Reading and writing
Sometimes we may fall into or face a moral choice. That is a moral dilemma. Let’s read the letter on page 7 and see what’s Johann’s choice and opinion. Ok, finished? Now answer the following questions:
A. What’s Johann’s opinion about the Amber Room?
B. What’s his father’s opinion about the things found by him?
C. What happened to Johann when she was a pupil?
Keys:
A. Johann thinks the people who find the Amber Room should keep it for them own.
B. His father thinks as Johann does.
C. She found a little money and kept it to himself.
9. Completing the letters A & B and then giving your own letters
When you write your letter, you may choose to agree or not agree with the writer.
You must give a reason why you agree or don’t agree with the writer.
Be sure to give an example from your own life so that the reader can better understand your opinion.
Ⅲ Closing down
Closing down by a debating
There is a long ancient wall around a less developed town.
It is reported it has a long history, dating back to over 5 century BC. The local government is collecting money to repair and rebuild the wall. It has cost a lot of money. Some of your classmates think it is not worth. Some think it’s a good way to develop the local economy. Now Group 1 and 2 against Group 3 and 4. Let’s have the debating.
Closing down by dictation
The design for the room was of the fancy style popular in those days.
The room served as a small reception hall for important visitors.
The man who found the relics insist that it belongs to his family.
The room was completed the way she wanted it .
It was ready for the people of St. Petersburg to celebrate the 300th birthday of their city.
After that, what really happened to the Amber Room remains a mystery.
In a trial, a judge must decide which eyewitnesses to believe and which not to believe.
Is it something that more than one person believes?
A fact is anything that can be proved.
An opinion is what someone believes is true but has not been proved.
Part Two: Teaching Resources (教学资源)
Section 1: A text structure analysis of IN SEARCH OF THE AMBER ROOM
I. Type of writing and summary of the idea
Type of writing This is a piece of narrative writing.
Main idea of the passage The history of the Amber Room
General idea of 1st Para The simple description of the Amber Room
General idea of 2nd Para The present sent to the Czar
General idea of 3rd Para The detail adding and relocating of the Amber Room
General idea of 4th Para The stolen of the Amber Room in World War Ⅱ
General idea of 5th Para The rebuilding of the Amber Room
II. A tree diagram
The Amber Room: the best and biggest work of country’s best Prussian artists
Para.1
Section 2: Background information on culture relics
I. What is a culture relic? 何谓 “文化遗产”?
Cultural relics are physical reminders of what different peoples valued in the past and continue to value now. Without these relics, we could not cherish cultural traditions as much or appreciate the lives of the people who practiced those traditions. Although we may not often consider it, cultural relics are not only the possession of one culture. In a larger sense, it can be said that they belong to all peoples. For these reasons, this unit describes cultural relics not from China but other places. Looking at it from another angle, it can also be said that cultural relics preserves some aspect of cultural heritage and each relic, regardless of whether the same hands created many examples of it, is still a unique cultural expression and contribution.
II. The cultural relics of China in the world heritage site list《世界文化遗产名录》中的30处中国文遗产
本单元的主题是“文化遗产”，学生很可能已经亲身接触过当地的文化遗产，或是能过电视、报纸等媒体对此有了一定的了解，因此，在课前教师可让学生列举国内外著名的文化遗产，然后对“文化遗产”给出定义、分类或划分标准。到底，我国已有30处文物古迹和自然景观被联合国科教文组织世界遗产委员会列入《世界遗产名录》，以下是这些文化遗产的名称、性质和列人《世界遗产名录》的年份：
◆Mount Taishan(泰山)，listed as a world cultural and natural site in 1987.
◆The Great Wall(长城)，cultural site, 1987.
◆The Imperial Palace of the Ming and Qing Dynasties in Beijing and Shenyang(北京故宫、沈阳故宫)，cultural site, 1987,.
◆The Mogao Caves(敦煌莫高窟)，cultural site,1987.
◆The Mausoleum of the First Qin Emperor and the Terracotta Warriors(泰始皇陵及兵马俑坑)，cultural site,1987.
◆The Peking Man Site at Zhoukoudian(周口店北京猿人遗址),cultural site,1987.
◆Mount Huangshan(黄山),cultural and natural site,1990.
◆The Jiuzhaigou Valley Scenic and Historic Interest Area(九寨沟风景名胜区),natural site,1992.
◆The Huanglong Scenic and Historic Interest Area(黄龙风景名胜区),natural site,1992.
◆The Wulingyuan Scenic and Historic Interest Area (武陵源风景名胜区)，natural site,1992.
◆The Mountain Resort and its Outline Temple, Chengde(河北承德避暑山庄及周围寺庙),cultural site,1994.
◆The Temple and Cemeter of Confucius and the Kong Family Mansion in Qufu (曲阜孔府、孔庙、孔林)，cultural site,1994.
◆The Ancient Building Complex in the Wudang Mountains(武当山古建筑群),cultural site,1994.
◆Historic Ensemble of the Potala Palace, Lhasa(西藏布达拉宫),cultural site,1994.
◆The Lushan National Park(庐山)，cultural site,.
◆Mount Emei and the Leshan Giant Buddha Scenic Area(峨眉山一乐山大佛风景名胜区),cultural and natural site.1996.
◆The Ancient City of Pingyao(平遥古城),cultural site,.
◆The Classical Gardens of Suzhou(苏州园林),cultural site,1997.
◆The Old Town of Lijiang(丽江古城),cultural site,1997.
◆The Summer Palace(颐和园),cultural site,.
◆The Temple of heaven：an Imperial Sacrificial Altar in Beijing(天坛),cultural site,1998.
◆Dazu Rock Carvings(大足石刻),cultural site, .
◆Mount Wuyi(武夷山),cultural and natural site,1999.
◆Mount Qincheng and the Dujiangyan Irrigation System(青城山一都江堰),cultural site,.
◆Aucient Villages in Southern Anhui-Xidi and Hongcun(安徽古村落一西递、宏村),cultural site,2000.
◆Longmen Grottoes(龙门石窟),cultural site,2000.
◆Imperial Tombs of the Ming and Qing Dynasties(明清皇家陵寝),cultural site 2000.
◆Yungang Grottoes(云冈石窟),cultural site,.
◆Three Parallel Rivers of Yunan Protected Areas,natural site(三江并流),2003.
◆Capital cities and Tombs of the Ancient Koguryo Kingdom(高句丽的王城、王陵和贵族墓葬),cultural site,2004.
Unit 2 The Olympic Games
Period 1: Section 3: Words and expressions from unit 2 THE OLYMPIC GAMES
Aims: Learn about the words and read the words.
Important points: The pronunciation and the use of some words.
Difficulties: Usage of “admit” and “promise”.
honest
adj. 1. not disposed to cheat or defraud; not deceptive or fraudulent: honest lawyers 2. marked by truth: give honest answers 3. without pretensions: worked at an honest trade 4. without dissimulation; frank: my honest opinion 5. habitually speaking the truth: an honest man 6. worthy of being depended on: an honest working staff 7. free from guile: His answer was simple and honest
ancient
adj. 1. very old: an ancient mariner 2. in or of times long ago: ancient Rome and Greece 3. having existed since a very early time: ancient history/customs
compete
v. to try to win sth. in competition with someone else: John competed for a place at their school, but didn’t get it. compete for something; engage in a contest; measure oneself against others
medal
n. an award for winning a championship or commemorating some other event
host
n. a man who receives guests: He acted as host to his father’s friends. China is the host country for Olympic Games. v. be the host of or for: We hosted 4 couples last night.
magical
adj. possessing or using or characteristic of or appropriate to supernatural powers: a magical spell
interview
n. 1. the questioning of a person (or a conversation in which information is elicited); often conducted by journalists: My interviews with teen-agers revealed a weakening of religious bonds. 2. a conference (usually with someone important) v. 1. conduct an interview in television, newspaper, and radio reporting 2. discuss formally with (somebody) for the purpose of an evaluation: We interviewed the job candidates. 3. go for an interview in the hope of being hired: The job candidate interviewed everywhere.
athlete
n. a person trained to compete in sports
admit
v. 1. allow participation in or the right to be part of; permit to exercise the rights, functions, and responsibilities of: admit someone to the profession 2. allow to enter; grant entry to: We cannot admit non-members into our club. 3. serve as a means of entrance: This ticket will admit one adult to the show. 4. give access or entrance to: The French doors admit onto the yard. 5. afford possibilitye: This problem admits of no solution. 6. declare to be true or admit the existence or reality or truth of: He admitted his errors. 7. admit into a group or community: We’ll have to vote on whether or not to admit a new member. 8. have room for; hold without crowding: The theater admits 300 people.
replace
v. 1. put something back where it belongs: Replace the book on the shelf after you have finished reading it. 2. substitute a person or thing for (another that is broken or inefficient or lost or no longer working or yielding what is expected): He replaced the old razor blade. 3. put in the place of another; switch seemingly equivalent items: The con artist replaced the original with a fake Rembrandt. 4. take the place or move into the position of: Smith replaced Miller as CEO after Miller left.
relate
v. 1. have or establish a relationship to: She relates well to her peers. 2. be in a relationship with: How are these two observations related? 3. give an account of: The witness related the events. 4. have to do with or be relevant to 5. make a logical or causal connection: I cannot relate these events at all.
sail
n. 1. a large piece of fabric (as canvas) by means of which wind is used to propel a sailing vessel 2. an ocean trip taken for pleasure v. 1. traverse or travel by ship on (a body of water): We sailed the Atlantic 2. travel in a boat propelled by wind: I love sailing, especially on the open sea. 3. travel by boat on a boat propelled by wind or by other means: The QE2 will sail to Southampton tomorrow. 4. move with sweeping, effortless, gliding motions: Shreds of paper sailed through the air.
advertise
v. 1. call attention to: Please don’t advertise the fact that he has AIDS. 2. make publicity for; try to sell (a product)
promise
n. 1. grounds for feeling hopeful about the future: There is little or no promise that he will recover. 2. a verbal commitment by one person to another agreeing to do (or not to do) something in the future v. 1. give grounds for expectations: The results promised fame and glory. 2. make a promise or commitment 3. promise to undertake or give: I promise you my best effort. 4. make a prediction about; tell in advance
Period 2-3:A lesson plan for reading (AN INTERVIEW)
Aims
To talk about the history of the Olympics games
To read an interview about the Olympic Games
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by sharing
Morning, everyone! Today we are going to learn about THE OLYMPIC GAMES. But first, I’d like to know how much you know about the Olympics to be held in Beijing. Anything about it is ok. Oh, Li Lei, do you want a try?…Right. You know so much about the Olympics. Toady, we’ll learn more about it in ancient Greece.
Warming up by describing
Now, boys and girls. I’ll show you a video show of the 28th Olympic Games. Please tell me what it is about and describe it to the class. Ok, Wang Lin, please describe it. Wonderful. That’s Liu Xiang. The hurdle king!
Warming up by discussing
Hi, class. You know our country is trying her best to prepare for the 2008 Olympic Games. Every one is expecting and excited about it. Let’s discuss what we can do for it. And imagine what we will do at the 2008 Olympics.
II. Pre-reading
1. Asking and answering
Now, please read the three questions before the Reading. Let’s do it in turn. Let’s begin from the first row here…ok, you did a good job. Let’s summarize your answers.
For reference:
1. In Summer Olympics, there are running, swimming, shooting, wrestling, jumping, football, basketball, volleyball, table tennis, throwing, Javelin, weight lifting, gymnastics, boxing etc.
In winter Olympics, there are skiing skating, ice hockey, ski jumping, sledding, snowboarding etc.
2. The 29th Olympic Games will be held in Beijing on Auguster 18th, 2008.
3. To hold the Olympic Games is a rich prize for a country. And it can make a country known in the world. It can stimulate the country’s economy, and help to speed up its development.
2. Imaging and introducing
Please look at the three pictures in the reading. Please talk about them. Imagine whatever you can.
For reference: The first picture is the status of a great Greek. His name is Pausanias. He was a famous traveler and writer in the second century AD. His Guide to Greece is an extremely comprehensive guidebook for tourists, concentrating on buildings, tombs and status and including a lot of information on the mythological, religious and historical background to the monuments described. It is so informative that it may be called the foundation of classical archaeology and this ancient Baedeker is still used as a guide to classical Greece. Can you remember a famous ancient Chinese traveler and writer? He also wrote a book. Yes, his name is Xu Shake. His works is The Notes of Xu Shake’s travels.
The second picture is the opening ceremony of the Olympic Games. Maybe this is the principle stadium. It’s large and can hold thousands of audience.
The third picture is a Chinese athlete named Yang Yang. She won a gold medal for China in the winter Olympic Games. She is a famous skating player.
3. Talking and Sharing
We know there are many differences and similarities about the ancient and modern Olympics. Do you know anything about them? You can simply guess. Yes, Lucy, try …
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording and finding the general idea
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text AN INTERVIEW. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation as well as the pauses within each sentence. Then try to get the general idea of the passage. Have you got the main idea?
Yes, it tells us the differences and the similarities between the ancient and modern Olympics.
2. Reading and acting
Now let’s play the parts of the Greek writer Pausanias and the Chinese girl Li Li. Now boys, you are Pausanias; girls, you are Li Li. Please pay attention to the bold words.
3. Reading and finding
Now read the text again. The boys shall try to finish the task: What was the ancient Olympics like? The girls shall try to finish the task: What is the modern Olympics like?
4. Reading and collecting information
Ok, now let’s read it silently. First let’s talk about the same points between the ancient and modern Olympics. Who can answer? Any volunteers?
Then let’s come to the differences.
The similarities
① Both are held every four years.
② Both are held not for money but for honour.
③ The beliefs are the same. They are: Swifter, Higher, and stronger.
④ Men are allowed to take part both in ancient and modern Olympics.
⑤ Some events are the same, such as running, jumping, shooting and thowing.
The Differences
① There were not winter Olympics in the past.
② Now competitors are from all over the world. But in the ancient time, only the people in Greece could take part.
③ Only men were allowed to take part in the past, now woman are also allowed.
④ In the past, winners got the olive wreath as the prize. Now competitors compete for medals.
⑤ The events and athletes in modern time are more than those in the past.
⑥ There is a special village for the competitors to live in, a stadium for competitions, a gymnasium for these who watch the games now. But there were not in the past.)
5. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from AN INTERVIEW
take part in…, gold medals, the spirit of…, be held, in order to, host the Olympic Games, on a magical journey, find out, the present day Olympic Games, used to, write about…, come to your time, be admitted as…, two sets of…, enjoy competing in…, compete against…, for the honour of…, reach the standard, be admitted to…, play a very important role, as well as, a stadium for competitions, as a matter of fact, compete for…, olive wreath, feel proud of…, make… happy
Ⅳ Closing down
Closing down by doing exercise
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises 1 & 2.
Closing down by discussing
You know our government has tried its best to compete for hosting the 29th Olympic Games. It has cost a lot of money. Do you think it is worthwhile? Why?
For reference:
It is worthwhile to host the Olympic Games. To host Olympic Games can make our country known to the whole world. To host Olympic Games can make our culture and people understood by the other peoples. To host Olympic Games can stimulate the developing of our economy.
Closing by imagining
Imagine what we will do and what we can do for the 29th Olympic Games now.
For reference: Maybe we can serve as volunteers to help the foreign visitors and athletes from all over the world. So at present we should study hard. Especially we should try our best to learn English well.
Closing down by narrating
We can see the text is written in a conversational style. And there are two speakers. One is Pausanias, a Greek writer 2000 years ago, the other is Li Li, a Chinese girl. Now let’s change it into a narrative style. In other words, let’s describe the ancient and modern Olympic Games in our own words. Who would like to have a try?
For reference: The ancient Olympic Games began in Greece and were held from 776 B.C. to A.D.393. It was held every four years. At that time, there were not so many sports as today. And women were not allowed to take part in the games. There were not Winter Olympics at that time. Winners got the olive wreath as the prize. The motto was swifter, higher and stronger.
The modern Olympic Games began in 1891. They’re held every four years. There are many new sports in the Olympics. In the summer Olympics there are over 250 different sports. Women are not only allowed to join in but also play a very important role. Now the competitors compete for medals. The motto is swifter, higher and stronger.
Closing down by summarizing
As we have finished the passage we’ll sum up what we have learned. First let’s see the writing skills. It is written in a conversational style. It’s in a very interesting way. It adopts a dialogue between Pausanias who lived 2000 years ago and a Chinese gird in modern world. Through their dialogue, the differences and similarities between the ancient and modern Olympic Games are made known to the readers. Just because it is in a conversational style, there are quite a few oral spoken English and elliptical phrases.
Through the comparison between the ancient and modern Olympic Games, we have learned the differences and the similarities between them. Now we can have a deep understanding of the Games. From the passage, we can have a deep understanding of the Games. From the passage, we can also get to know that the Olympic Games are developing and improving. It’s our duty to make the Olympic Games better and healthier. We know that one of the slogans for 2008 Beijing Olympic Games is Green Olympic Games. It shows that people are paying more and more attention to our environment.
Period 4: A lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The Future Passive Voice)
Aims：
To learn about future passive voice
To discover useful words and expressions
To learn the methods of words formation
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by dictating
There are several important sentences in this unit. Let’s dictate them. If you can’t, learn them by heart after class.
① When and where will the next Olympic Games be held?
② I live in what you call “Ancient Greece” and / used to write about the Olympic Games more than 2000 years ago.
③ All countries can take part if they reach the standard to be admitted to the games.
④ The next Olympic Games will be held in my hometown.
⑤ It is just as much a competition among countries to host the Olympics as to win an Olympic medal.
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 11 and do exercises 1, 2, 3 and 5 first. Check your answers against your classmates’.
II. Learning about word formation
1. Do exercise 4 and discover the rules.
Turn to page 12 and find out the rules of word formation.
By adding -ing to a verb, we can change the verb into a noun.
That means we can change “doing some sport” into “the name of the sport”.
By adding -er to a verb, we can change the verb into a noun. That means we can change “doing some sport” into “the person who does the sport”.
2. Means of word-formation in general
Affixation, conversion, and composition (or compounding) are the chief means of word-formation in English. Besides these, there are also other minor ways of word-formation including clipping, acronymy, blending etc.
III. Learning about Present Future Passive Voice
Turn to page 13 and do exercise 3. And tell the class the formation of present future passive voice.
For reference: Well done, class. We can follow the following formlation to turn the future tenses into future passive voice; be going to be done, be about to be done, be to be done, will / shall be done, would / should be done.
Ⅳ Closing down by summarizing
1.Present future passive voice (take “ask” for example)
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
I
You
He/she/it will be asked
We will (shall)
You/They will I
You
He/she/it will not be asked
We will (shall) not
You / They will not Will (shall) I
Will you
Will he/she/it be asked
Will (shall) we
Will you / they
2.The passive Voice of phrasal verb
Generally speaking, only transitive verbs can form the passive voice, for only transitive verbs can be followed by objects. But many intransitive verbs together with some prepositions and adverbs can be used as transitive verbs. So they can also be followed by the objects. Therefore they can also be used in passive voice.
But note that all the phrasal verbs are used as a whole. When using them in passive voice, we cannot drop out the prepositions and adverbs. For examples:
At last they put out the fire. At last the fire was put out.
They will put up a notice on the wall. A notice will be put up on the wall.
Have you sent for a doctor? Has the doctor been sent for?
I have never heard of such a thing before. Such a thing has never been heard of before.
We must take good care of the children here. The children must be taken good care of here.
His classmates laughed at him for the foolish mistake. He was laughed at for the foolish mistake by his classmates.
Period 5-6: A lesson plan for using language
Aims:
To read about the ancient Olympic Games
To listen and talk about hobbies
To write about hobbies
Procedures
1. Warming up
Warming up by introducing
Hi! Class. You know Greece is the world-known country with an ancient civilization. It has a long history with so much marvelous culture. The Greeks had wonderful stories about the Gods and Goddnesses who were part of their religion. They believed that these god or goddesses would help humans if they felt sorry for them or if the humans were good people. However, the Gods did not always help. They behaved like people who were unpredictable and capricious. To try to get the support of the Gods people had to pray to them and offer them present. In this story the Goddess Hera, the wife of the chief God, Zeus was sorry for Hippomenes and agreed to help him.
Warming up by sharing
Now, boys and girls. Is there anybody who can tell us some Greek mythology. You know they are so famous in human history. Or can you speak out some names of Greek Gods and Goddesses.
Prometeus 普罗米修斯 -- a son of the former chief God
Sphinx斯芬克斯 -- a being with a human face but a lion body
Pandora 潘多拉-- a beautiful girl with every ill and evil thought and deed
Zeus宙斯-- the chief God who governed the world
Hera 天后-- the wife of Zeus who governed the love
Ⅱ. Guided reading
1. Reading and judging
Read the text THE STORY OF ATLANTA, and complete the True or False guestions after the text on page14.
2. Reading and answering
Read the text again, and answer the following questions.
A. What was Atlanta’s problem?
B. What were Atlanta’s rules?
C. What was Hippomenes’ amazement?
D. What made Hippomenes change his mind?
E. Whom did Hippomenes turn to for help?
F. Can you guess what was the ending?
For reference:
A. Atlanta could run faster than any men in Greece. But she was not allowed to run in the Olympic Games.
B. She promised to be married to a man who could run faster than her. If he could not run as fast as her, he would be killed.
C. Hipppomenes could not understand why so many young men wanted to risk their lives.
D. Atlanta’s beauty made him understand his amazement and change his mind.
E. He turned to the Goddess of love for help.
F. Hippomenes was killed because of losing his race.
G. He ran faster than Atlanta and married her.
3. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from THE STORY OF ATLANA
be allowed to, run against…, will be pardoned, hear of…,be amazed, as fast as…, change one’s mind, ask… for help from…,
promise to, will be relaxed, pick up, be confident about…,share one’s pain, run past…,compete with…, cheap to marry
4. Listening
For listening turn to page 15 and be ready to do exercises 1.
First read the questions carefully and imagine what is the listening about.
When doing exercise 2, you must make clear what is wrong with the sentence. And tell the class which is correct, which is wrong and which is only half true.
5. Acting
Next we are going to put the text A STORY OF ATLANTA on stage. You know there are four charactors in the story. Who would like to be them?
Who will be Alanta’s father, the old king?
Who will be the Goddess of Love?
Ok. Li Li, you are the Greek princess. Zhang Qiang, you are the brave young man Hippomenes. Lucy, you are the Goddess of Love. Zhou Gang, you are the princess’s father. The rest of class, please prepare it in groups of four. Then act your play before class.
A text play of THE STORY OF ATIANTA
Time: one morning in spring
Place: at the palace
People: the old king(K), the princess (A), the young man (H), the Goddess of love (L).
F: My dear daughter, you see how beautiful the spring is! You are just like the spring flowers. Why don’t you marry? So many young kings and princess want to marry you, and they are all so rich, smart and nice.
A: Oh, dear father. I have promised that I will only be married to a man who can run faster than me. I will run against him. If he cannot run as fast as me, he will be killed. No one will be pardoned.
F: But, my dear daughter. No man has won you. They all sent themselves to death. When will you get married?
A: I won’t marry unless I am allowed to run in the Olympic Games. (Hippomenes is allowed to come in)
H: Oh, my kindest king and my prettiest princess!
I’ll marry the princess. I’ll compete with you.
A: Do you know the rules?
H: Yes, princess!
F: Oh, young man! Go away! You can’t win her. You are only losing your life!
H: No, I want a try!
F: Foolish thing! Go away! Don’t go to die! (Hippomenes was pushed away and felt sad, crying. The Goddess of Love is watching everything above him in the sky and pities him)
L: Oh, young man, what’s the matter? Why are you so sad?
H: Oh, my Goddess, can you help me? Can you help me to win the princess and marry her?
L: Ok, young man. Do you really want to marry her and love her?
H: Of course. She is so beautiful.
L: Ok, it is easy. Take these three golden apples.
Throw apples in front of Atlanta when she is running past and she will be relaxed. When she stops to pick it up, you will be able to run on and win.
H: Oh, thank you, my Goddess!
(Hippomenes returns to the palace)
K: Well, young man, why are you here again?
H: My kindest king. I want to marry her and run against her!
K: Well, young man. I repeat. Don’t be silly! Go away!
H: No. I love her. I will marry her － or die!
6. Speaking
Now, class. Let’s carry out a survey of the interests in the class and write down the names of the classmates who have the same interests. You can carry out the task like this.
Which do you like, sport, music or collection?
Which of the sports do you like best?
What is your favorite sport?
Are you interested in table tennis?
After the survey, the ones who have the same interests sit together and please work in groups of four to talk about their interest.
Why do you like this sport / music / collection?
When do you begin to like it?
What’s enjoyable about the hobby?
What have you learned from the hobby?
III.Guided writing
1. Writing an imagined dialogue
Groups 1 and 2 are going to write an imagined dialogue between the princess and Hippomenes. You may begin like this : Oh, my dear princess, I want to marry you…
2. Writing a description
Turn to page 16 and follow the direction to write a description of your favorite hobby.
Here is an example:
Swimming is my favorite sport. I like it because it can bring me much fun. The process of learning swimming is very interesting. You can try different ways of swimming, such as breaststroke and backstroke. You can swim at any time of the year if you like. In hot summer, if you jump into the river or the sea to have a swim, you’ll feel cool and comfortable. Even in cold winter, you can swim if you are brave enough. It’s a healthy sport and it can build up your body. If you are a beginner, you must be careful.
You’ll better not swim alone and bring life buoy with you in case of danger. If you want to be a good swimmer, you must have a lot of practice and have great determination.
IV. Closing down by finding information
Go to the library to read or get online to search in order to find more information on the Olympic Games and the ancient Greek mythology. Take notes of your finding and report to your groupmates next Monday morning.
Part Two: Teaching Resources
Section 1: The writing style of the reading AN INTERVIEW
Type of writing Conversational style
Main idea Comparing the differences between Ancient and Modern Olympics
Characteristics By comparing and contrasting
Section 2: Background information on the Olympic Games
I. Events of the Moden Olympic Games
Archery, Baseball, Badminton, Basketball, Beach, Volleyball, Boxing, Canoe/Kayak, Cycling, Diving, Equestrian, Fencing, Field Hockey, Gymnastics, Handball, Judo, Modern Pentathlon, Rowing, Sailing, Shooting, Soccer, Softball, Swimming, Synchronized Swimming, Table Tennis, Tennis, Tae kwon do, Track & Field, Triathlon, Volleyball, Water Polo, Weightlifting, Wrestling
II.Olympic Traditions
The Olympic Anthem
The Olympic anthem was written by the Greek national poet Costis Palamas and composed by Greek musician Splros Samaras. It was first sung at the 1896 Games. The IOC adopted it as the official Olympic anthem to crown olympic ceremonies at the 1958 IOC Session in Tokyo.
The Olympic Motto
The Olympic motto “swifter, higher, stronger”comes from three Latin words”citus, altius, fortius”, which actually mean”faster, higher, braver”. The French educator, Baron Rerre de Coubertin, who revived the ancient Olympic Games and in 1896 led the first modern 01ympic Games in Athens, borrowed the phrase from a Dominican priest Henri Dinon. Mr.Dinon introduced these words while presenting athletic prizes at a college in 1891.But how did these words become the motto of the Olympic Games? It was Michel Breal who introduced this phrase at the closing dinner of the congress for the reestablishment of the modern Olympic Games on June 23,1894.Later, the International Olympic Committee formally adopted this phrase as the official motto of the Games.
The Olympic Creed
The Olympic creed was also introduced at the 1896 Games. As stated by Pierre de Coubertin, the creed is as follows:”The most important thing in the Olympic Games is not to win but to take part, just as the most important thing in life is not the triumph but the struggle. The essential thing is not to have conquered but to have fought well.”
The Olympic Flag
It was Pierre de Coubertin who conceived the idea of the Olympic flag with five coloured interlocking rings on a white backround. The rings represent the union of the five continents and the meeting of the athletes from all around the world at the Olympic Games.
Today, almost a century after the flag’s creation, the six colours, those of the rings (blue, yellow, black, green, red) and that of the white background which stands for peace, still maintain their symbolism and can be found in flags across the world. The Olympic flag was first used during the Antwerp Games in 1920.
The Olympic Oath
“In the name of all the competitors, I promise that we shall take part in these Olympic Games, respecting and abiding by the rules which govern them, in the true spirit of sportsmanship, for the glory of sport and the honour of our teams.”
At the opening Ceremony of each Games, one athlete from the host country takes Olympic oath on behalf of all competing athletes. This particular gesture of sports-manship was introduced at the 1920 Games in Antwerp, Belgium. A coach or team official takes a similar oath at each Opening Ceremony.
The Olympic Flame
The Olympic flame is one of the most visible symbols of the modern Games. Its tradition has survived from the Games of ancient Greece, where a sacred flame, ignited by the sun, burned continually on the altar of the goddess Hera.
The modern Olympic flame was first lit in 1928 at the Amsterdam Olympic Games, where it burned throughout the competitions. It has become a major symbol for solidarity among nations and embodies the Olympic spirit encompassing the ideals of purity, the endeavour for perfection, the struggle for victory, friendship and peace.
The Torch Relay
During the 1896 Games in Athens, young inspired sportsmen had organised the first torch relays. However, the tradition of the Olympic torch officially began at the Berlin Games in 1936. As in ancient times, the torch is lit by the sun in Ancient Olympia, then passed from runner to runner in a relay to the host city, where it is used to light the Olympic Stadium’s flame during the Games’ Opening Ceremony. The flame then burns until it is extinguished at the Closing Ceremony.
Unit 3 Computer
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
Period 1: Words and expressions from Unit 3 Computers
Aims: Learn about the words and read the words.
Important points: The pronunciation and the use of some words.
Difficulties: Usage of “admit” and “promise”.
common
n. 1. an area of grassland with no fences which all people are free to use or a piece of open land for recreational use in an urban area (常用于专有名词中): Every Saturday Jean went riding on the village common. Harlow Common is very beautiful in winter.哈洛公园在冬天时风景很美。2. in common: in shared possession 3. out of common: unusual adj. 1. of or associated with the great masses of people: The common people in those days suffered greatly. 2. to be expected; standard: common decency. 3. common to or shared by two or more parties: common friend. 4. of no special distinction or quality; widely known or commonly encountered; average or ordinary or usual: the common man. 5. belonging to or participated in by a community as a whole; public: for the common good. 6. commonly encountered: a common (or familiar) complaint. 7. being or characteristic of or appropriate to everyday language: common parlance. 8. lacking refinement or cultivation or taste: behavior that branded him as common. 9. of low or inferior quality or value: produced...the common cloths used by the poorer population.
simple
n. 1. any herbaceous plant having medicinal properties 2. a person lacking intelligence or common sense adj. 1. not elaborate in style; unornamented: a simple country schoolhouse. 2. (bota
篇11：模块一 第一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
模块一 第一单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) She is 70 years old, and the skin has become l .
2) It is a idea to play football all day without a break.
3) We usually use g , such as waving, nodding our heads, to talk to people who is far away.
4) To avoid this pollution disaster in the future, we should not i it anymore and please try to pay more attention to our atmosphere.
5）Thank you for your c about the matter of the hawkers in Tak Tai Street.
6) The Smiths are tired of moving now and then and when they got to this little town of California, they finally s down.
7) Most of the farmers in my hometown go out to work at dawn and get back at d .
8) Unlike the grown-ups, most of the t in middle schools are more sensitive than rational.
9) Sorry, I’m not so sure. If you could give me some t , perhaps I could know the answer.
10) “Oh, Sam, I’m only having you on. No need to be u .” said
Frodo.
2. 重点词词形变换
1）It would be to demand of a person who is lack of power of
to become a detective. That’s one of the why I think he is more suitable to be a worker. (reason)
2) Joanna is quite angry that she was by the boss in this task. But in fact I think if she thinks so, she is merely for she is completely in of this task. (ignore)
3) No man can imagine the he got when he lost the game. In fact he was a . He had the ability to win, but he was forced to lose the game. It was for him. (suffer)
4) All the members came to an that Kitty had an voice and that only when she to, should we ask someone else to represent our school to take part in the speech contest. (agree)
5) The doctor asked the patient to be confident in his from the disease, for this kind of disease is , and he was strong enough to from it soon. (recover)
6) The new-born baby was an to the family. “And it brings some
cost to the family.” the mother. (add)
7) Though Tom and John are not very , they can in sign language, which is a common method of between the blind. (communicate)
8) Though Shella tried her best to win the praise of the master on , she still failed it. She was so upset that she wandered in the street . (purpose)
9) As far as I’m , the accident is no of mine, but it my friend. (concern)
10) The two claimed to be born in , and that they knew no other language but . (German)
1.短语积累
add up把某物加起来
get sth done 让某事被做
calm down 安静下来；让某人安静下来
be concerned about 关心；担心
go through 经历；遭受；检查；讨论；被通过
set down 放下；记下；让某人下车
a series of 一系列
to do with 处理
on purpose 故意地；有目的地
at dusk 黄昏时
face to face 面对面
no longer 不再
take no notice of 不注意
suffer from 受某事之折磨
get tired of 对某事感到厌烦
have trouble with 做某事有麻烦
at the moment 目前；现在
get along with 与某人相处
fall in love with 爱上某人
make friends with 与某人交朋友
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) When you these numbers, you will see how many points you have got.
2) Although he is 20 years old now, he still living alone. He even doesn’t know how to wash clothes.
3) Because he of what the teacher said, he didn’t know what he should do.
4) When John and his wife had some arguments, they would sit down together and discuss the problem .
5) Sorry. I didn’t mean to hurt you . I had wanted to throw at the dog.
6) Our parents us all the time while we children seldom take care of them.
7) He was too scared and didn’t know what the accident.
8) At the first sight the boy the pretty girl although he didn’t know whether she loved him.
9) You are a little baby. You must learn to look after yourself now.
10) I too much bad luck. I don’t care to have one more.
重要句型
1. But your friend can’t go until he/she finishes cleaning his/her bicycle.（P1）
not...until……句型：“直到……才”，主句动词一般需要用短暂性动词，如：finish, hand in, die, go, begin等等。
【词汇网络】not...until可以变化为更加地道的英语句型：
Not until...did/will sb do sth
It was/is not until...that sb did/will do sth
即时强化练习：
用not until翻译下列句子，每句至少用三种句式。
1）直到我去到百货商店我才发现没带钱包。
2）直到她的先生消失在她的视线范围之外，她才痛哭失声。
2. It /This/That is (was) the first/second/third/last time that...某人第一（二，三，最后等）次做某事
在此句型中，若主句时态是一般现在时，即用is，以that引导的定语从句常用现在完成时态。若主句时态是一般过去时，即用was，以that引导的定语从句常用过去完成时态。
This is the first time that I have ever enjoyed this kind of food.
这是我第一次吃这种食品。
It was the third time that he had been informed of the change of the meeting.
这是他第三次被告知会议作了改变。
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：オ
1) 那已经是我第五次离开家到广州去学习。
2) 这是我第一次有机会跟你们面对面地交流。
目标解读
1. Ignore the bell and go somewhere quiet to calm your friend down.(P1)
calm v. & adj.
1) vt.使平静，使镇静
The nurse calmed the little boy by giving him some candy.
保育员给那小男孩一些糖果，使他安静了下来。
He took a deep breath to calm himself.
他深吸了一口气以使自己平静下来。
2) vi.平静下来，镇静下来
The excited football fans calmed down at last.
激动的足球迷最终平静了下来。
3) adj. （心境）平静的，镇静的，沉着的; (天气)平静无风的；
（时代）和平安宁的
The sea was calm after the storm.
经过这场风暴后，大海平静下来了。
After the storm it became calm again.
暴风雨过后，天气又恢复了平静无风。
He was calm when I told him the bad news.
当我告诉他这个坏消息时，他很平静。
【词语辨析】calm, quiet, still与silent
calm平静的，沉着的。指无风浪的或人心情不激动的。
quiet平静的，安静的。指不吵闹的或心境不烦躁的。
still 静止的，不动的。指（人体等）不运动的。
silent 沉默的，缄口的，寂静的。指不讲话或没有声音的。
【拓展】calm down平静下来，镇定下来（既可作不及物动词短语也可作及物动词短语）
The crying child soon calmed down.
哭闹的小孩不一会就安静下来了。
It was difficult to calm down the football fans.
要使足球迷们平静下来是有困难的。
(注意：前例句的calm是不及物动词，后例句的calm是及物动词。)
2. Add up your score and see how many points you get.
add vt. & vi. 增加：添加；（数字等）加（起来）；补充说
Add more hot water, please. 请多加点热水。
If you add 4 to 3, you’ll get 7. 四加三得七。
Add up these figures, please. 请把这些数字加起来。
I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.
【派生词】addition n. 增加，附加物；adder n. 「计」加法器
【词汇网络】与add 有关的词组：
add sth. to sth. 把……加到（进）……
add to(=increase)增加
add up to共计（无被动语态）；意味着，等于说
add sth. up/ together把……加起来，合计
3. Tell your friend that you concern about him/her.
concern v. & n.
1) vt. to have sth. to do with or relate to 涉及，关系到（一般不用于被动时态）This concerns the healthy growth of children deeply.
这事对孩子们的健康成长关系极大。
2) vt.使担心（挂念），使忧虑（常用于被动语态）
We’re rather concerned about father’s health.
我们相当担心父亲的健康。
3) n. 所关切的事，关心，担心，担忧
It’s no concern of mine. 这事与我无关。
His mother’s only concern was how to make him study even harder.
他妈妈心里想的全是如何使他学习更刻苦。
【词汇网络】有关concern 的短语还有：
with concern 关切地
show concern for sb. 对某人表示关心
have no concern for 毫不关心
as/so far as...be concerned 就……而言
of much concern 很重要，很有关系
of no concern 无关紧要，没有意义
it is no concern of mine/yours. 这不关我（你）的事。
be concerned about (for) 关心，挂念
We are all concerned for (about) her safety. 我们大家都担心着她的安全。
我们需要注意，在这里从中文角度考虑，应该是主动，但是英语中却必须用被动，类似这样常用被动来表示中文的主动意义的词组还有：
be associated with 与……联合、联系
be attached to 附加于、隶属于……
be based on 以……为基础
be composed of 由……
be connected with 与……连结、连接
be divorced from 和某人离婚
be educated from 从学校等毕业
be employed in 从事于……
be engaged to 和某人订婚
be exposed to 暴露于……，面临于……
be faced with 面对……
be fed up 吃得过饱，对……极其厌倦
be honored with／to瞓e（phr．） 被授予……；因做……而感到荣幸
be involved in 卷入、陷入……；专心于
be married to 和某人结婚
be prepared to do sth 准备好了去做某事
be rooted in 扎根于……
be set in 以……为背景
be used to＋v－ing（phr．）习惯于……
be hidden in 藏在某地
be dressed in 穿着
be seated 坐在
另外还有表示情感情绪的动词，当表示“感到……”时，用过去分词，这类动词有：amazed，amused, annoyed，astonished，concerned，confused，delighted，disappointed，discouraged, disgusted，distressed，excited，frightened，interested, irritated，moved，pleased, puzzled，relieved，shocked，touched。
4. It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face. (P2)face to face 面对面地，类似的“名词+介词+名词”的结构还有：
hand in hand，手牵手地 arm in arm 手挽手地，
side by side 肩并肩地 mouth to mouth 嘴对嘴地
back to back 背靠背地，背对背地，一个接一个，连续地；
see eye to eye 看法完全相同，完全同意，面对面看着(与see连用)；face to face 面对面地，当面地，对立地；
front to front 面对面地；
hand to hand 短兵相接地，逼近地，肉搏地；
head to head 头对头地，面对面地，促膝地，交头接耳地；
heart to heart 开诚布公地，心连心地，贴心地，推心置腹地，坦率地，诚恳地；knee to knee 膝靠着膝地，促膝地；
man to man 个人对个人地，一对一地，人盯人地，私下地，坦率地，真诚地；nose to nose 面对面地，迎面(相遇)；
shoulder to shoulder 肩并肩地，齐心协力地，互助，一致，团结；
5. I stayed awake on purpose. (P2)
stay vi. & link v.
1) vi. 停留；逗留
The doctor told him that he would have to stay in hospital for another two weeks. ひ缴告诉他，他还得在医院住两个星期。
2) link v.保持，持续不变 (=keep)
How can you stay so cool and calm after such a hot argument?
这样一场激烈的争论过后，你怎么还能保持如此冷静沉着呢？
【词汇网络】系动词的分类记忆：
“变化”类：become，turn, go, get, grow, fall, run, come
“感官”类：feel, smell, taste, look, sound
“显现”类：look, appear, seem
“状态”类：keep, stay, remain, stand, sit, prove
on purpose 故意地；有意地；有目的地
I don’t think he did it on purpose, for he is really a kind person.
我认为他不是故意这样做的，因为他真的是一个好人。
on 在这里表示处于某种状态或在某个方位，类似的短语还有：
on board 乘（车,飞机） on call 听候召唤
on duty 值班 on earth 到底
on fire 着火 on foot 步行
on guard 在岗 on hire 雇用
on holiday 度假 on leave 休假
on one餾 knees 跪下 on one’s way 在……的路上
on purpose 故意 on sale 待售
on shore 在岸上 on time 准时
on the move 行动 on the other hand 另一方面
on the spot 当- on the tip of one’s tongue 快要说出口 on top of 在……的顶部 on watch 值班
6. Make a list of reasons why friends are important to you. (P2)
reason n. & v.
1) n. 「C, U」原因，理由，动机，理性，理智
The reason why (that) she was ill was that she had eaten bad meat.
【提示】reason后的定语从句的引导词是关系副词why 或that，也可以省略。I have a good reason for doing that =I have a good reason to do that.
我那样做是有充分的理由的。
【提示】reason 后的定语常是介词短语for (doing) sth., 或不定式to do sth.
【词汇网络】①for this (that) reason 因为这个/那个原因
②by reason of由于，因为
2) vt. & vi.推理，推究，劝说
We reasoned that he was lying. 我们推断他在说谎。
Finally I reasoned him into /out of accepting the invitation.
最终我说服他接受（拒绝）邀请。
【词语辨析】reason 与cause
reason 侧重指做某事的理由；cause指导致不良后果的起因。
--What’s the reason for your absence?
你为什么缺席？
--The reason for it is that the traffic was heavy.
我缺席的原因是交通拥挤。
The cause of the big fire was his carelessness.
大火的起因是他的粗心大意。
【派生词】reasonable adj. 合情合理的；reasonably adv. 合情合理地；reasoned adj. 合乎逻辑的
其它 写出单词意思
add point upset ignore calm concern loose cheat reason list share feeling Netherlands German outdoors crazy nature purpose dare thunder entirely power according trust indoors suffer teenager advice questionnaire quiz situation editor communicate habit
add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away set down a series of on purpose
in order to face to face according to get along with fall in love
join in
1、 add vt./vi
add up sth. =add sth. up 把…加起来add to sth. 增添、加某事物
add…to… 把…加到…里 add up to=amount to 共计，总计
① If you ____ 5_____3 you will get 8.
② This bad weather ________ our difficulties.
③ His whole school education _______________ no more than one year.
2、 point n./v.
There is no point （in） doing sth. 做…没用，无意义
at/on the point of … 就要…的时候point at/to…指向… point sth. at/ towards sb./ th
① 我们正要离开这时你们来了。 We were __________________ leaving when you came.
② 我们赢（输）了5分。We won (lost) the game ____ 5 _________
③ Can you tell us the main _______ of the story?
④ “That’s the man who did it,” she said, ________________ me.
⑤ The robber _______a gun ________ the bank clerk.
3、 concern vt./n.
be concerned about/for 关心 as concerns=concerning (prep.)关于
as/so far as…be concerned 就…而言 concerned adj. 有关的担心的
① 就英语而言，他是我们班最好的
_______________________________, he is first in our class.
② I am living in school, and mother _____________________me.
③ He doesn’t bother about things that don’t ____________ him.
④ Present at the meeting were leading members of the departments ____________.
⑤ This book deals with questions _________Anti-Japanese War.
4、 share v/n
a) Let Tom play with your toys as well, Clare---you must learn to__
A. support B. care C. spare D. share
b) Culture refers to a group or community ___we share common experiences that shape the way we understand the world.
A. with which B. that C. which D. what
c) 我不得不与家里人共用一个浴室。I have to ___________ the bathroom _________ the rest of the family.
d) 他是唯一的一位与我的观点相同的人。 He is the only person who __________my opinion.
5、 reason n.+ for/to do sth. for the reason of….
a) This is the reason ____he explained to me just now.
A. why B. which C. because D. about which
b) The reason _ he is late is _ there was a breakdown on the railway.
A. why; why B. because; that C. that; because D. why; that
c) Give your reason _____changing the plan.
6、 go through sth.经历忍受或遭受…；被正式通过或接受;仔细检查；（书） 发行次数；用光或消耗…
get through 穿过；（使）通过；使（读）完;接通
a) Two months later, the law _________________.
b) I rang you several times but couldn’t ______________.
c) I have ____________ all my pockets but I can’t find my keys.
d) The dictionary has ____________________ ten editions.
e) When you _____________ with your work, let’s go out.
7、 join ; join in ; take part in; attend
a) Will you ________ the lecture on science?
b) Would you like to _______ us ___ playing football?
c) After ____________ the League, he often helps others.
d) She ______________ the music competition.
e) We _______ a country club that year.
f) We’re going to visit the flower show tomorrow. Will you ____ us?
g) The boy ________ the English Evening and had a good time.
h) He didn’t _________ school yesterday because of his illness.
8、 Put away the tools after work, will you? ________________
He puts away part of his wages each month. ________________
She put away the idea of going home. ________________
He put away his wife without good reasons. ________________
9、 ① --- Is it high time we ______ to school?
---Oh, it’s seven o’clock. Let’s go.
A. will go B. shall go C. went D. would go
② 这是她第一次跟英国人交谈
③每次我见到他，他总是在备课。
10、 It is/was + 被强调部分+that/who+其他成分
a) It was 8 o’clock _____ I went back home last night.
A. that B. when C. which D. what
b) __________you missed such a fine lecture? A. How it was that B. It was how that C. How was it that D. Was it how that
c) I just wonder _______ that makes you so excited.
A. why it does B. what he does C. how it is D. what it is
d) It was not until she got home __ Mary realized she had lost her keys. A. that B. when C. where D. before
第二单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) I have got three days’holidays I New Year’s Day.
2) She’s busy at p and can’t speak to you.
3) The captain c his army to attack the enemy at night.
4) Don’t respond to any e-mails r personal information, no matter how official they look.
5) I r him as soon as he came in the room， though I hadn’t seen him for years.
6) The new g is made up of ten officials.
7) H difficult the task may be, we’ll fulfill it in time.
8) It is I to turn your back on someone who is speaking to you.
9) He was last seen heading in the d of Miami.
2. 重点词词形变换
1) Everybody laughed, the teacher . (include)
3) Do you like the films by Zhang Yimou?
He is a well-known Chinese . (direction)
4) The police only interview a child in the of an adult. (present)
5) We should study hard for the of China. (modern)
6) These are the world’s leading industrial . (native)
7) Dean’s a really person to have around when things go wrong.
Only Jack is of great at that time.(use)
8) The bag is -it has a hole in it. (use)
9) I’ve known Barbara for years， since we were babies, . (actual)
10) It was a period of population growth. (rapidly)
1. 短语积累
play a role / part in 在……中起作用
be based on 以……为依据
because of 因为
such as 例如，像……这样的
come up 走近
the number of …… 的数量
a large number of 许多
make good full use of 充分利用
2. 用所给短语将下列句子译成英语
1) 运气在他的成功中起了重要作用。(play an important part in)
2) 这出戏以真实故事为基础，很有教育意义。(be based on)
3) 约翰没有出席会议，因为他病了。(because of)
4) 充分利用你所拥有的每一个机会练习讲英语。(make good use of)
5) 今天缺席的学生有五人。(the number of)
重要句型
1.... than ever before 比以往任何时候
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：
1) 受到老师激励，我比以往任何暑假都要更加努力工作。
2) 今年的冬天比以往任何时候都冷。オ
2. This is because ……这是因为……
翻译下列句子：
1) 他今天没有来上学，这是因为他病了。
2) 我不要求你按时完成, 这是因为我不想给你太大压力。
3. even if / even though... 即使，尽管
即时强化练习：
翻译下面句子：
1) 即使你不喜欢他，也可客气一点。
2) 即使你不想去，你也应该告诉他一声。
目标解读
1. They are called world Englishes and they include Canadian, British, American and Indian English. （P9）
include vt. 包括，包含
The bill includes tax and service. 账单中包含了税金和服务费。
Your duties include checking the letters and sorting them out.
Ten students took part in the competition, including three girls.
Ten scientists, six women scientists included, were present at the meeting.
【重要提示】including一般位于名词或代词的前面，included则位于名词或代词的后面
【词语辨析】include / contain / hold
include 强调“包括，作为整体的一部分”，侧重范围或整体。
contain 着重“其中包含有”，指在一定范围或容器内容纳某物，侧重包含的内容或成分。
hold 指“能容纳”
The bok contains ten chapters, including American Literature.
This kind of fruit contains lots of vitamin C and B.
这种水果富含维生素C和B。
The hall holds 200 people. 这个大厅能容纳200人。
2. World Englishes come from those countries where English plays an important role as a first or second language, either because of foreign rule or because of its special role as an international language.（P9）
because of 是复合介词，表原因，意为“因为”，后接名词、代词、或宾语从句。because 作连词，后跟句子。以原因状语从句形式表明主句的根本原因。
He was late not only because of his illness but also because he missed the train.
【词汇网络】表示“由于”的短语还有：
thanks to “多亏，由于”，只能作状语
Thanks to your advice, much trouble was saved.
due to 可以作表语，状语，不可位于句首
The accident was due to the storm.
owing to 可以作状语或表语，作状语时常用逗号隔开，作表语相当于due to.
Tom’s failing in the exam was owing to his carelessness
Owing to his careless driving, the accident occurred.
as a result of “由于”，作状语
on account of “因为”，作状语
. Would you please come up to my flat for a visit?(P9)
come up 上来，过来；
A child came up to me and showed me the way to the station. (走近，上来)
The sky was dark blue and clear when the moon came up. (升起)
Your question came up at the meeting. (被提出讨论)
【词汇网络】come up with 想出（计划，答案）
come out 出来，（花）开，出版；结果是
come about 发生
come across 偶然遇见
come along 一起来，一道走；进展；进步
come to 共计，达到
. English is also spoken in many other countries in Africa and Asia, such as South Africa, Singapore and Malaysia.(P10)
【词语辨析】such as, for example
such as 意为“例如，诸如……之类的”，用来列举同类人或事物中的几个。如果要把同类人或事物全部列举出来，用that is或namely。
A lot of things can be recycled, such as waste paper, waste plastic bags, and old batteries.
for example举例说明，列举同类人或事物中的“一个”，作插入语，且用逗号隔开，可位于句首、句中或句末。
Most boys in my class like physics. Tom, for example, shows a special interest in it.
5. Believe it or not, there is no such thing as standard English.(P13)
such与all, no, some, any, few, little, many, much, several, one等词连用时，应位于它们的后面。
There is no such thing as a free lunch.
世上没有免费午餐之类的好事儿。T
here are three such mistakes in your composition.
你的作文中有三个这样的错误。
6. Today the number of people learning English in China is increasing rapidly.(P10)
the number of...表示“……的数量”
a large number of 相当于a good / great many或many，表示“许多的，大量的”其后跟可数名词的复数形式，不可跟不可数名词。如：
The number of trees on the deserted mountain is over 200,000.
在那片荒山上种植的树木数量已超过二十万棵。
A great many (A number of) visitors come to the Palace Museum every year.
每年有大量的游客故宫参观。
其它 写出单词意思
elevator, petrol, gas, official, because of, native, apartment, actually, be based on, at present, gradually, Danish, vocabulary, make use of, spelling, fluent, fluently, Singapore, Malaysia, such as, frequent, frequently, usage, African, Spanish, play a part, recognize, accent
be different from, pay a role(part) in, because of, either …or…, in/on a team, the number of/a number of, than ever before, even if, comp up to, over time, communicate with, be based on, make use of, have one’s own identity, such as, Only time can tell, native speaker, as well as, solve a problem, believe it or not, no such a…, all over the world, at the top(bottom) of, pen friends, to this day, sum up, Pardon?, beg your pardon, go abroad, be used for, more of a …, encourage sb. to do sth., work on, feel like sth., from time to time, English-speaking countries, from one…to another, do business, on the air, would like sb. to do, make notes, fight against, keep…a secret, even though, save time(money), a form of…
1. recognize be recognized as 被承认为 recognize sb. to be 承认某人是…
① --- oh, it’s you! I ______ ________ you. ----- I’ve just had my hair cut, and I’m wearing new glasses.
② Though they hadn’t met for many years，they ______ each other at first sight.
③ Lincoln is recognized ____ one of the greatest presidents in America.
2. direction
in all directions 朝四面八方 under the direction of sb = under one’s direction 在某人的指导下 in the direction of 朝着…方向 from the direction of 从…方向 follow/ obey /listen to one’s direction 听从某人的指导
①． The diretion ____ which the president would go was kept secret ____ safety concern.
A.for; over B. from; about C. in; for D. at; as
②． Generally speaking, when ____ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.
A. taking B. taken C. to take D. to be taken
③. she ______ (问了方向) and then tells her friends.
④. Tom went off _____ ______ _______ and Harry in another.
⑤. He did the work ____ _____ _______.(在我的指导下)
3．Command
Command sb to do sth 命令（要求）某人做某事 have a good command of … 对…精通
Command that … (should) + 动词原型
He commanded that all the gates __________.
A. should shut B. would be shut C. shut D. be shut
4． Request
Request sth of/ from sb. 向某人请求某物 request sb to do sth 请求某人做某事 at one’s request 应某人之请求 request that … (should) + 动词原型
①．Visitors ____ not to touch the exhibits.
A. will request B. request C. are requesting D. are requested
②. The old pianist wouldn’t listen to our repeated request that he ____ in public again.
A. play B. played C. would play D. was going to play
③. He came here ____ A.at my request B. by me request C. by the request of me D. for my request
5. contain, include, cover 区别：
Contain 整体包括部分 A contains B A与B 是不同类事物 或者一个容器中容纳的东西
Include A includes B A与B是同类事物，常用两种表达方式：including sth/ sb= sb’sth included
Cover 钱够...之用；足以支付
①．---- How come a simple meal like this costs so much?
-----We have ____ in your bill the cost of the cup you broke just now.
A. added B. included C. contained D. charged
② We all went, ______ Mary.= We all went, Mary _______.
③ ----- Will $200 ____ the cost of the damage? ----- I’m afraid not. I need at least 100 more.
④ He was worried, because he lost his bag ______ his passport, ID card and a lot of money.
6. present
at present= at the present time 目前；现在 be present at the meeting 出席会议 present sth to sb 把...赠给某人 present sb with sth 赠给某人某物
①All the people _____ at the party were his supporters.
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
②. They ______ a sum of money ____ (赠与) the college in memory of their son.
7. more A than B (A/B: adj.原级/n.) 与其说B不如说A
no more than + num. = only 仅仅
①．More than one ___ the people heart and soul.
A. officials has served B. officials have served C. officials has served for D. officials have served for
②.---- Tom is very stupid. He failed to pass the exam once again. ----- He is ____ than stupid.
A. lazier B. no lazier C. more lazy D. lazier rather
8Come up 上升；上来；被提出 come up with （人）找到或提出（答案或方法等）
Come about 发生 come up to 达到 come across （偶然）遇见；碰到
用come有关短语填空：
①. Would you _________ my flat for a visit?
②. The question _______ at the meeting whether we had enough money.
③. She ____________ new idea for increasing sales.
④. I ________ children sleeping under bridges.
⑤. Can you tell me how the accident _________?
9. because of/ due to（不可放于句首）/ thanks to/ owing to 由于 + n./ pron. /动名词/名词性短语
because + 句子 as a result of 因为...的结果 result in 导致 result from 由...导致 填空：
① I didn’t attend the meeting, _________ I was ill.
② He is absent _________ his illness
③ He was ill, __________, he didn’t attend the meeting.
④ His illness ____________ his absence from the meeting.
⑤ His absence from the meeting _______________ his illness.
10. make use of/ make good use of/ make full use of
①If better use ___________ of your spare time, you will make great progress in it.
②she wondered uneasily what use she would ______ ___ this opportunity.
11. the same... as 表示同类的事物 the same ... that 表示同一个事物 the same ... which/ who/ when /where 和...相同的...
①.This pen is not very good; I’d like the same one ______ you are using now.
②.He went back to the same place ______ he had found the ring.
③.The explorer took only such men and things ______ he really needed into the thick forest.
④.I’m lucky enough to find the same knife _____ I lost yesterday.
12. 用because/ why/ that 填空：
① She didn’t study hard. That was _______ she failed in he exam.
② she failed in the exam. That was ________ she didn’t study hard.
③ What caused the accident was _____ the bus was driven too carelessly.
④ The reason _______ he hasn’t come is that he has to send his mother to the hospital.
⑤That is _____ she left her hometown at the age of nine.
第三单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) His paper will be published in the British Medical J next month.
2) We can’t goods in railways.
3) I knew you would be too s to listen to my advice.
4) I I that you go to the hospital immediately; you are very ill.
5) Are you doing the task in the p way?
6) The size of your feet d the size of your shoes.
7) What is you’re a to the idea, agree or disagree?
8) He has a gift for language, and he is f with three languages.
9) He broke the r in high jump in the Asian Games.
10) I was very busy that day, but he p me to take part in the party.
2. 重点词词形变换
1) The of live animals is forbidden. (transport)
2) They scored in the minute of the game. (finally)
3) After a little gentle , Mr.Brown agreed to let us in.(persuade)
4) Her to do well made her keep on studying. (determine)
5) The are all from China. (cycle)
6) The woman showed great in going into the burning building to rescue the trapped child. (brave)
7) The events have been the of conversation for weeks. (topic)
8) The young lady wanted to buy a pair of tennis . (short)
9) Make sure the job is done .(proper)
10) The tourists were caught in the snowstorm in the area. (Tibet)
1.短语积累
keep a travel journal 写旅游日记
see the world through one’s eyes 透过眼睛看世界
agree to sth 同意
on the/one’s journey 在旅途中
as usual 照例；像往常一样
stay awake 保持清醒
keep asking sb. 不断问
one way fare 单程票
at an altitude of 5,000 meters 在海拔5000米的地方
dream about/ of (doing) sth. 梦想做……
graduate from college 大学毕业
persuade sb. to do sth. 劝说某人做某事
get sb.interested in doing sth. 使……对……感兴趣
care about 关心;考虑
a determined look 坚决的表情
change one’s mind / change one’s attitude
change our minds 改变想法
make up one’s mind
make up our minds 决定
give in 投降; 上交
give in to sb. / sth. 屈服；同意……
pass through 穿过
flow through 流经……
make camp 扎营
put up the tent 支帐篷
for one thing,... for another,... 一方面……另一方面……
familiar to sb. 为……所熟悉
in detail 详细地
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) She being famous one day.
2) The only thing he seems to is money.
3) O’Neil was to pressure from London to hurry the reform.
4) How can we him politics?
5) Kate didn’t want to buy that skirt., it was very expensive;
its style was out of fashion.
重要句型
1. It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.(P18)
此句包含英语中的强调句型：it + is/was + 被强调部分 + that/who + 原句其余部分。要注意：被强调部分表示“人”的话，用that/who, 其他情况下都用that.
It was Jack who/that broke the window yesterday.
即时强化练习:
用强调句型翻译下面句子
1) 我是在那棵树下面捡到这只钱包的。
2) 是他把窗户的玻璃打破的吗？
3) 你是因为什么而没有参加会议的？
2. Are you working this evening?(P21)
此句用现在进行时 are working 来表示按计划进行的将来的动作。
I’m writng the composition at night.お
即时强化练习：
翻译下面句子
今天下午一位美国来宾将在礼堂举行一场英语讲座。
目标解读
1. I have dreamed about taking a great bike trip.(P18)
dream about: 做梦；梦见
I dreamt about you last night.
dream of/about: 梦想，幻想
We dream of buying our own house.
【词汇网络】dream away 虚度（光阴）
dream up 虚构出
have a dream 做梦
2. When we graduated from college, we finally got the chance to do it.(P18)
graduate from : (大学或中学)毕业
Wang Ming graduated from Beijing University with a degree in law.
finally: adv. 最后，终于
final: adj. 最后的，决定性的 n.决赛
【词语辨析】finally, at last, in the end，eventually
finally: 可以表示时间位置，相当于at last / in the end; 还可以表示时间的先后顺序，如同first(ly), second(ly), then, last。
at last: 只指时间位置，强调经过周折、等待、耽误的“最后、终于”出现所期待的结果。
in the end / eventually: 只指时间位置，强调经过周折、等待、耽误的“最后、终于”出现所期待的结果（相当于at last）或者出现非期待的结果。
3. Then she persuaded me to buy one.(P18)
persuade: vt. 说服; 信服
persuasion: n. 说服
persuasive: adj. 有说服力的
persuade sb. to do sth/ into doing sth. 说服某人干某事
persuade sb. not to do sth/ out of doing sth 说服某人别干某事
persuade sb. of sth. 使某人信服
I finally managed to persuade Mary to go out for a drink with me.
Don’t let yourself be persuaded into buying things you don’t really want.
He persuaded me not to go there. / He persuaded me out of going there.
We finally persuaded Ben of the wisdom of this decision.
4....she insisted that we find the source of the river and begin our journey. (P18)
insist: v. 坚持宣称/认为（宾语从句的谓语用陈述语气）；
坚决要求，一定要（宾语从句的谓语用虚拟语气should + v.）
Mike insisted that he was right.
They insisted that everyone (should) come to the party.
【词汇网络】insist on （doing）sth. 坚持
if you insist 如果你一定要这样
Her parents insisted on speaking to the headmistress.
He kept insisting on her innocence.
--Why don’t you call them up today?
--Oh, if you insist
【词语辨析】insist on, stick to
前者表对“要求、意见、看法等”的“坚持”；后者表对“愿望、原则、决定、诺言或某种理论”的“坚持”
5. She gave me a determined look-the kind that said she wouldn’t change her mind. (P18）
1) determine: v. 确定；决定，支配；（官方）确定，规定
determination: n. 决心，（官方）决定
determined: adj.
determine to do sth. 决定做.……
be determined to do sth.有决心干……
We determined to leave at once.
I am determined to find out who is responsible for this.
Determined that his son would do well, Mr.Smith sent him to a private school.
2) change one’s mind（about）改变主意/决定
Try and get her to change her mind about coming with us.
【词汇网络】make up one’s mind (to do sth.) 下定决心做……
be in two minds about 拿不定主意，犹豫不决
set one’s mind on (doing) sth. 下定决心要┳觥…
come to mind 突然想到
put one’s mind to 专心于……
keep one’s mind on 专心于……
keep / bear sth. in mind 记住……
bring / call sth. to mind 回想起……
其它 写出单词意思
journal, fare, transport, prefer, disadvantage, fare, flow, cycle, persuade, graduate, finally, schedule, fond , be fond of , shortcoming , stubborn, care about , make up one’s mind , determine, give in , valley, pace, altitude, bend, boil , forecast, parcel, reliable, organize, journey, insurance, wool, as usual, view , pillow, midnight, at midnight, flame, beneath, temple, cave, change one’s mind,
1 imagine
imagine +v-ing
我难以想象我与那种女子结婚后的情形。
I can’t ______ my ______ a girl of that sort。
2 choose （chose ，chosen）
have no choice but to do sth 除了干某事别无选择
She had no choice but ______away 。
A go B to go C going D to have go
3 persuade
Persuade sb to do=persuade sb into doing 说服某人做某事；
persuade sb not to do=persuade sb out of sth/doing 说服某人不要做某事；
Persuade sb of sth =persuade sb 。+that 从句 使某人相信；
① While shopping ，people sometimes can’t help ______ into buying sth。 They don’t really need。
A to persuade B persuading C being persuaded D be persuaded
② Alice trusts you，only you can ______her to give up the foolish idea 。
A suggest B attract C attempt D persuade
③猎人劝阻我们不要独自穿越茂密的丛林。
The hunter ______us ______through the thick forest alone 。
4 insist
Insist 表达“坚持主张”时，所跟的宾语从句使用虚拟语气；表达“坚持一种说法，看法或事实”时，宾语从句使用陈述语序和相应的时态。
① I insisted that a doctor ______ immediately。
A has been sent for B sends for C will be sent for D be sent for
② He came to my class every week ，but his attitude ______that he was not really interested。
A expresses B described C explained D suggested
5 determine
Determine + n。/determine to do/ determine +从句
Be determined to do 决心做
determined a。 已下决心的（不在名词前）；断然的，决然的
①______ to train his daughter in English， he put an ad like this in the paper。“______ ，an English teacher for a ten-year-old girl ，”
A Determined ，Wanted B Determined ，Wanting C Determine ，Wanted D Determining ，Wanting
②她坚定不移要上大学。
She ______ ______ ______ go to university。
6 fun Make fun of 取笑 for fun 为了高兴，为了好玩
①______ at the seaside ！
A How fun the children had B What a fun the children had C How fun had the children D What fun the children had
② 独自一个人去参加聚会没什么意思。
It‘s not much ______going to a party alone
7 awake
①When do you usually ______ up？
② I s he ______or asleep？
③ He lay ______ all night。
④ They were making enough noise to ______ the dead 。
8 give in屈服投降让步
give away不小心透露，赠送，免费给予 give off 放出，散发（光，热，烟，气，味）give up 放弃，认输 give out vt。分配，分发 Vi。（食物，燃料，电力） 用光，精疲力竭
① Never ______ ______ the stugy of English
② Jane tried to keep up a calm appearance ，but her trembling voice ______her ______
③ He may ______to my view
④ It is always the husband who ______ first when quarrel breaks out between the young couple 。
⑤ Her patiece finally ______ ______
⑥ The teacher ______ ______ the exam paper 。
9 for one thing 。。。for another （thing）/besides； on （the ） one hand ，on the other （hand）
for one thing 首先。。。一则。。。，陈述两方面的情况常一致，常与for another （thing）/besides（再者，另一方面）呼应； on （the ） one hand ，on the other （hand）常表达相矛盾的两方面
①______ she‘s well eduacated ，______ she is pretty 。
A On the one hand ，on the other hand B for one thing ，for another
C On one hand ，but also D On the one hand ，on another hand
②Tom works very hard。His brother ，______，does‘t do much at all。
A what‘s more B on the contrary C for one thing D for another
③ ______ ， the hotel is near the sea，but ______it costs a lot。
A On the one hand ，on the other hand B for one thing ，for another
C On one hand ，but also D On the one hand ，on another hand
10 care about 关心，对。。感兴趣；在乎
care for 喜欢，愿意，照顾
① I don‘t ______ what others think
② She doesn‘t ______ skating 。
③ I wonder whether they will ______ us all to go there
④ The captain ______ the safety of the crew。
11 用 cost spend pay take 填空
①It ______ us two hours to finish the work。
② Tom ______a lot of money on books。
③ The new bicycle ______ him 100 dollars
④ Mary ______ 200 dollars for the evening dress
⑤ I‘m ______much more time in listening now
⑥ The money I ______ for the service added up to1000dollars every year 。
⑦ It will ______ you 5dollars to fly to London
⑧ The car ______all his savings
⑨ The man got what he wanted ，which is at a ______of his own life and his family‘s happiness。
第四单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) Before the earthquake, you can notice that the wells have c in them.
2) Before the earthquake the chickens and even the pigs are too n to eat.
3) Two-thirds of the people died or were （受伤）during the earthquake.
4) Older students were having difficulty in studying and o themselves.
5) A great part of the city was d in the earthquake.
6) I felt everything s during the earthquake so I couldn’t sit still.
7) She c her face in her hands and cried loudly.
8) Seeing a baby crying in the burning house, the firemen r her from the house.
9) She is always healthy. Whenever I see her, she looks f .
10) J from his appearance, the manager can’t be over 60.
2. 重点词词形变换
1) Whether the can be separated is not an international affair, but a one. It is up to the people to decide. (nation)
2) Please wipe the off the table. The room looks with
the table. (dirt)
3) Most people protect themselves fromto their self-esteem, for they think if their self-esteem wasgreatly, they will feel. (injure)
4) from the result, the of the match must have controlled the match quite well. Do you agree with my ? (judge)
5) can be found everywhere. Sometimes one’s hair seems . Some equipment can be . (electricity)
6) As , some were wounded when they were trying to find out something of the government .(report)
7) We visited the of Yuanmingyuan last summer. It by the foreign invaders. Seeing the palace we feel very pitiful. (ruin)
8) Taste and are closely connected. If you can’t the food, you can’t taste it either. (smell)
9) The felt happy that they were able to the accident and joked that it was because of the of the fittest. (survive)
10) We all felt to be invited to take the action and we promised on our that we would do it bravely, even if we died . (honour)
1.短语积累
shake hands with 握手
as usual 像往常一样
break out 爆发
right away 马上；即刻
a number of 许多；大量
to the north of 在……北面
put up 举起；张贴
be proud of 对……感到自豪/骄傲
judging from 根据……判断
be known as 作为……而出名
come out of 从……出来
too...to... 太……而不
give out 用完；出故障；分发；宣布
be trapped under the ruins 陷在废墟下
instead of 代替
in honour of 纪念
tens of thousands of 几万
more than 超过；不仅仅
fall down 倒下
at an end 结束；终结
dig out 挖出；查明
wake up 醒来
in ruins 严重受损；破败不堪
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) A terrible earthquake hit the city and in a few seconds the whole city lay .
2) It’s a custom others when they meet in China, while in Japan they bow to each other.
3) following his father’s advice, Jack did just the opposite, which made his father angry.
4) from his expression, he must have won a prize.
5) The whole class the boy student who won the first prize in the English Contest, for he was the honor to their class.
6) The children were busy a tent and it would be completed before dark.
7) Meizhou the Capital of Hakaees, for there are most Hakaees living there.
8) The monument (纪念碑) was set up those who died in the terrible disaster.
9) The monitor helped the teacher the graded test papers.
10) The terrible shaking of the building all the people who were sleeping.
重要句型
1. What do you think may happen before an earthquake? (P25)
疑问词 + do you think/suppose + 陈述句语序的句子？
When do you think he will arrive here?
你认为他什么时候能到这里？
シ译下列句子：
1) 你认为是谁拿走了我的雨伞？
2) 你想我们什么时候来制定计划？オ
2. It seemed that the world was at an end! 似乎是世界末日！（P26）
It seems/appears/happens + that从句 “似乎/碰巧……”
=Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to do sth 某人似乎/碰巧要做某事。
Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to be doing sth 某人似乎/碰巧在做某事。
Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to have done sth 某人似乎/碰巧做过某事。
It seems that we will have a hard time. = We seem to have a hard time.
似乎我们将要过一段艰难的时光。
翻译下列句子：
1) 似乎他从未思考过这样的问题。
2) 碰巧当时大家都在室外干活。
目标解读
1. For three days the water in the village wells rose and fell, rose and fell. (P26)
rise：
1) vi. 上升
The sun rises in the east and sets down in the west.
起立；起床
Knowing that she wouldn’t help, he rose and set off for home.
知道她不帮忙，他站起来回家了。
增长
The cost in supporting a family is rising quickly recently.
维持一个家庭的费用近来迅速地增加。
2）n. 上升；上涨；升起
a rise in price 价格的上涨
give sb. a rise 给某人提工资
at the rise of the sun 日出之时
【词语辨析】rise与raise
(1) 两者都可表示“升起”之意，这时rise是不及物动词，而raise是及物动词。The price of meat has risen sharply lately.
最近肉价上涨很快。
The butchers will raise the price of meat in a few weeks.
肉商几个星期内将提高肉价。
(2) 表示“起立、起床、增长”时只能用rise。
Although very tired, when hearing the alarm, he rose from the bed quickly.
虽然很累，当听到闹钟响起时，他迅速地从床上爬起来。
(3) 表示“饲养、提出”时要用raise。
He is just the person who raised such a good plan.
正是他提出了这么好的计划。
2. Two thirds of the people died or were injured during the earthquake. (P26)
injure 受伤；伤害
He was badly/seriously injured in the accident.
他在事故中严重受伤。
Drinking too much surely will injure one’s health.
喝太多酒当然会伤害到一个人的健康。
injured adj. 受伤的
injury n.伤口；受伤处
【词语辨析】injure: 受伤
wound: 受伤（一般强调外伤）
harm: 意指无形的伤害，“对……有害”
hurt: （肉体或精神上的）伤害，强调疼痛
Don’t often listen to the loud music. It will harm your hearing.
In the modern war, not many soldiers were wounded or killed.
Your words really hurt him a lot.
He fell from the second floor and was badly injured /hurt.
3. In the farm yards, the chickens and even the pigs were too nervous to eat. (P26)
too...to... 太……以至不能……。例如：
The boy is too weak to lift the heavy box．
这男孩太虚弱，举不起那个重箱子。
当too...to...跟少数形容词（如ready,glad,pleased,apt,willing,inclined，eager, easy, satisfied等）搭配时，不定式无否定意义。例如：
He is too ready to promise．他轻于许诺。
Beginners are too apt to make mistakes．初学者极易出错。
He is too much inclined to give himself airs．
他太喜欢装模作样了。
需要注意的是，too... to... 的否定形式not too... to... 的意思是“不是太……而不能”。 例如：
He is not too young to dress himself．
他不是小得连衣服都不会穿。
It is never too late to learn．活到老，学到老。
too还因此形成一类特殊而重要的用法，具体如下：
cannot（或can never）... too... 表示“怎么……也不会过分”、“越……越好”的含义。如：
One can never be too careful in one’s work．工作越细越好。
One cannot be too careful in making the decision as it was such a critical case．
因为这是一个如此重要的问题，所以在做出决定时无论怎样谨慎都不过分。 You cannot praise the play too highly．
这出戏你无论怎样称赞都不会过分。
4. But one million people of the city, who thought little of these events, went to bed as usual that night. (P26)
think little of 不重视；认为没价值
It is wrong to think little of everything. 对什么都不在乎是不对的。
She thought little of my work. 她不看重我的工作。
【词汇网络】类似词组：
think much of 认为某人很重要
think better of sb. 对某人印象好；看重某人
think better of sth. 改变……念头；打消主意
think highly of 看重；器重
think well of 重视
think little of 看轻；看不起
think poorly of 不放在眼里；轻视
think nothing of 轻视；认为无所谓；认为没什么了不起
as usual 照例；和平常或习惯一样：
As usual, I slept late that Saturday morning.
和平时一样，那个星期六早晨我起得很迟
5.Sand now filled the wells instead of water. (P26)
instead adv
1) 替代；更换
If you cannot go, let him go instead.
如果你不能去，让他替你去。
2) （与of连用）代替
We’ll have tea in the garden instead of in the house.
我们将改在花园喝茶，而不在屋里喝。
6. Describe your feelings about the city, which is known as the “Brave City of China”. (P29)
1) be known as +身份
2) be known for... 因……出名
The area is known as a green tea producing places.
这个地方是以绿茶生产地而闻名的。
The town is known for its fine park.
这个小镇以它精致漂亮的公园而闻名。
3) be known by 根……而得知
A person is known by the company he keeps.
根据他经营的公司可知道他这个人。
4) be known to 被某人所了解
It is known to all that theory comes from practice.
大家都知道理论来自实践。
7. One other thing to remember. (P31)
one other :应该注意限定词顺序,
“限定词”包括：冠词、物主代词、指示代词、或数词，它位于各类形容词前。它本身分为三位，即：前、中、后。前位限定词有all、half、both、分数和倍数；中位限定词有冠词、指示代词、物主代词等；后位限定词有基数词和序数词，但序数词位于基数词前。如:both my hands、all half his income等。
8. An outline will prepare you to write a better story. (P31)
prepare
1) prepare “准备；预备；筹备；制作；配制”
①prepare + 名词或代词。例如：
He has prepared his lessons. 他已备好课了。
②prepare + 双宾语（间接宾语和直接宾语）。例如：
The secretary has prepared the president a long report.
= The secretary has prepared a long report for the president.
秘书已为董事长准备好了一份长篇报告稿。
③prepare + 动词不定式短语。例如：
They are busy preparing to go on vacation.
他们正忙着准备去度假。
④prepare + for （或 against ）引起的短语。例如：
The students are busy preparing for the mid-term examination.
学生们正忙于为期中考试作准备。
The peasants are preparing against the drought.
农民们正在为抗干旱作准备。
2) prepare“使（人）作好准备；叫（人）作准备”：
①prepare + sb/oneself + for sth.例如：
He was preparing himself for the marathon race then.
他当时正在为参加马拉松比赛而作准备。
②prepare + sb/oneself + 动词不定式短语。例如：
He prepared himself to take out a license for a driver.
他为取得汽车驾驶执照作了准备。
3) 过去分词 prepared 用于系表结构，意思为“为……做好准备；打算”：
①be prepared + for （或 against ）引起的短语。例如：
They were prepared for the worst.
他们已准备好应付最坏的情况。
② be prepared + 不定式短语。例如：
I am not prepared to listen to all your weak excuses.
我不愿听你那些不成借口的借口。
其它 写出单词意思
earthquake, quake, right away, well (n.) , million , event , pipe, burst, as if, at an end , nation , canal, steam, dirt, ruin, in ruins , suffering, extreme, injure, destroy, brick, dam, track, useless, steel, shock, rescue, trap, electricity, disaster, dig out, bury, mine, miner, shelter, a (great ) number of , title, reporter, bar, damage, frighten, frightened, frightening, congratulation, judge, sincerely, express, outline, headline, cyclist
shake,well,rise,smelly,pond,pipe,burst,canal,steam,ruin,injure,destroy,brick,dam,useless,steel,shock,quake,rescue,electricity,disaster,army,organize,bury,coal,mine,shelter,fresh,percent,speech,judge,honor,prepare,Europe.crack, survivor, miner
right away, at an end, dig out, give out, thousands of
重点句子
1. Farmers’ wives noticed that the well walls had deep cracks in them.
2. It seemed as if the world was at an end!
3. Bricks covered the ground like red autumn leaves.
4. The army organized teams to dig out those who were trapped and to bury the dead.
5. Workers built shelters for survivors whose homes had been destroyed.
shake, rise, crack, burst, well, smelly, pond, steam, destroy, ruin, injure, survivor, brick, useless, shock, quake, rescue, electricity,
disaster, organize, bury, coal, mine, shelter, fresh, percent, honor, prepare.
② 短语：right away, at an end, lie in ruins, be trapped under sth, to the north of sp, put up, give out, wake sb up, prepare sth for sth., think little of sth.
选词填空
dream of , make up one’s mind, change one’s mind,
give in, give up, insist on, stick to, determine to
John is a mountaineering-lover, who has _________conquering the Alps, a mountain with an altitude of 4804 meters since he was a middle school student. However, his mother thought that mountaineering was such a dangerous sport that she always tried to persuade him to _________. It is his deep love for climbing that made him __________ realizing his dream.
One day, John got the chance to climb the Alps. His friends __________ form a team to pay a visit to the Alps and of course John joined them happily. In order to do the trip properly, they examined every detail. Feeling his son’s great determination, John’s mother knew that he would not_____________. Finally, John and his friends succeeded in conquering the Alps.
第5单元
词汇过关
1.重点单词拼写
1) We should pay more attention to the q as well as the quantity.
2) He is always w to help anyone who is in t .
3) Whatever difficulty you meet, I hope you will never lose h .
4) Everything needs to be done according to a certain (原则,原理)
5) People in Iraq are dreaming of living a p life, that is they hope to live in p .
6) The thief was caught and was s in p for 3 years.
7) During the p when I was in my university, I studied l myself and became a l after graduation.
8) The final examination is coming. Our teacher a us to go over
our lessons carefully.
9) If it c to rain for some days, the crops would be destroyed.
10) If he gets that (职位），I think he can do it well.
11) He received a sum of money, but he didn’t want to a it.
12) They don’t want to solve the problem with v . Instead, they hope to solve it in a peaceful way.
13) In some countries, especially in some poor countries, women are not
really e to men.
14) If you feel cold while sleeping, you can add a b on your quilt.
15) As a well-e person, it’s hard for us to imagine that she treat the boy with such (残忍).
2. 重点词词形变换
1) The pupils got to know that Liu Hulan was a and died and they were moved by her deeds. (hero)
2) They were so that they cut the man into pieces . We all felt sure that they would be punished by their . (cruel)
3) He is really a man with many , but do you think you are
enough to do the work? (quality)
4) Let him do what he . He is not to do that if it is against his . (will)
5) pay for work. That’s our rule. If we can’t treat every client , we will break the in our company. (equal)
6) We all enjoy the of the countryside, for we can live with the nature and live a life there. (peace)
7) You are not allowed to commit any , or you will become
a and be sentenced to prison for the act. (crime)
8) The big waves beat the coast . The wind blew with great , which caused a storm. (violence)
9) If this proposal is to you, you must it. In this way the proposal will meet with general . (accept)
10) She is always having the of snakes. She finds it to come across a snake, which will her very much. (terror)
1.短语积累
put...into prison 把……投进监狱
in fact, as a matter of fact事实上
fight against 与……作斗争
come to power 上台执政
break the law 违反法律
without pay 没有报酬
lose heart 灰心；泄气
be active in 积极参加；活跃
be willing to do something 愿意做某事
be out of work 失业
be stopped from doing something 被阻止做某事
answer violence with violence 以暴制暴
be in good health 健康良好お
blow up 发脾气；爆炸
ask for 索-
be in trouble 处于麻烦中
die for 为……而死
advise somebody to do something 建议某人干某事
in reward for 作为……的回报
set up 建立
be sentenced to 被判处……
worry about 为……担心
be free from 免去……之苦
2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中
1) Whatever great difficulty we meet, we’ll never .
2) If you can’t finish the work on time, you’ll be .
3) Your parents are you: do make a phone call to them.
4) She has been for a year and is looking forward to being in work again.
5) People expect to pollution and live in a pleasant environment.
6) -- I thought you wouldn’t mind.
--Well, I don’t; but you should have asked me first.
7) Several people were killed and many were hurt when a bomb at the busy street.
8) As soon as he arrived in Paris, he for the wrongs his family had done.
9) As a Jew, Einstein was forced to leave his homeland after Hitler .
10) The government has a working party to look into the problem of drug abuse.
11) He death because of killing someone on purpose.
12) The women workers should the men in pay since they do the same work.
重要句型
1. The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress. (P34)
拟人用法：时间、地点 + see/eyewitness + 事件。
1949 eyewitnessed the foundation of the People’s Republic of China.お
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：
1) 我们学校是1993年成立的。
2) 在这个村庄曾经发生过一次灾难。
2. Only then did we decide to answer violence with violence. (P34)
Only+状语+部分倒装句
Only in this way can we find the correct answer.お
即时强化练习：
翻译下列句子：
1) 只有当你遭遇过这样的事情后你才会相信。
2) 只有在这样的一个家庭你才有这样的好生活。
目标解读
1. Will you help others with their work if they ask you? (P33)
help sb with sth 帮助某人做某事
Would you please help me with my homework?
help的其它用法：
1）help sb. (to) do sth. 帮助某人做某事。
Can you help me to learn English?-
2）help oneself （ to sth ）自用（食物等）；随便拿
Help yourself to the fish. 请随便吃鱼。
3）help sb. into/ out of 搀扶某人进入 / 走出。
He helped the patient out of the hospital.
他搀扶病人走出了医院。
Can you help the patient into the hospital?
你能搀扶病人进医院吗？
4）help sb. out 帮助某人克服困难，渡过难关、解决问题、完成工作。 When I’m in trouble, he always helps me out with money.
每当我处境困难时，他总是用金钱帮助我渡过难关。
Please help me out with thi
篇12：高一英语必修一必背知识点总结
1.基础梳理
diary fare transport finally persuade stubborn organize source determine altitude reliable forecast beneath sightseeing insurance bend dream of/about doing sth persuade sb to do get sb interested in make one’s mind give up care for
be determined to do can’t wait/can hardly wait to do sth
2.词语归纳
1)transport
作动词，常和from…to…连用。
作名词，也可是transportation，表示“运输，运送;运输工具，交通车辆”。
常用词组：be transported with… 情不自禁 in transports of sth 情不自禁
2)persuade
作动词，后常接指人的代词或者是名词。意为“劝说好某人”。
persuade sb to do sth “劝说某人做某事”。
persuade 表示劝说是成功的，若表示劝而不服，不能用persuade，通常在其前加try to或者是want to ，也可以用advise。
persuade sb into doing sth 说服某人做某事 persuade sb out of sth 说服某人不要去做某事
persuade还可以表示“使某人相信”，常见用法： persuade sb that+从句 persuade+of短语
be persuaded that+从句
3)insist
是动词，后接介词on+名词或者动名词，也可以加他that从句，表示“坚决，强调，坚持主张”，从句中谓语动词要用虚拟语气，即should+动词原形，should可以省略。
insist on后接动名词，如果有逻辑主语，可以用名词或者名词所有格，也可以用宾格形式，但不能用代词的主格形式。
insist 还可以表示“坚持说，力言”，其后的宾语从句要用陈述句语序。
insist后面不能跟不定式。
determine
作及物动词，表示“决定”，只能跟名词或者不定式(短语)作宾语，不能跟动名词(短语)。
determine on/upon doing=be determined to do决定做某事
determine sb against sth 使某人决定不做某事
determine和be determined后面都可以跟宾语从句
篇13：高一英语必修一必背知识点总结
1. ever since 自从
I haven’t heart from him ever since last year.
我自从去年以来就未曾受到过他的来信。
Ever since 引导的时间短语或从句作状语常与现在完成时连用。
2. dream 梦、做梦
1) Vi.
做梦 dream a/an +adj. + dream “做了一个……梦”
Dream a good dream 做了一个好梦
梦见 dream +that
She dreamed that they can fly.
在否定和疑问句中作“想到，料到”后接that从句
I never dreamed that he would be so handsome.
做梦也没有想到他如此帅
2)Vt.
dream about/for“梦见;梦想;向往”
I once dreamed of Dod.
我曾梦见过上帝
3).最否定和疑问句中接介词of “想到、料到”
I wouldn’t dream of hurting you.
3. persuade vt. 说服、劝服：
1)persuade sb. to do sth=persuade sb. into doing sth
说服某人做某事
I have persuaded him to give up smoking.
我已经说服他戒烟理科
2)persuade sb out of (doing) sth 劝说某人不要做某事
We persuaded him out of his foolish plan.
我们劝他停止了他的愚蠢的计划
3)persuade “是……相信”，后加that 从句
I am firmly persuaded that she was telling the truth.
我坚信事实就是这样
advise:只劝说，不一定说服
The doctor advised me to eat less meat.
医生劝我少吃肉
3. graduate v.毕业
graduate from 从……毕业
I graduated from Peking University.
graduate n. 毕业生，大学毕业生
graduation n. 毕业
4. finally, in the end, at last
1) finally强调活动过程的终结，“最后”“末了”一是在列举事物或论点时引出最后一项内容;二是在动词前面表示“等了好久”
2)at last 与finally的第二个用法相同，但往往用于一番拖延或曲折后，因而带有浓厚的感情色彩。如不耐烦、不愿意
3) in the end 与finally 的第二个用法相同，而且能用于预卜将来，而at last和finally则不能
高一英语必修一知识点总结5篇精选
篇14：人教新课标必修1 unit 1 and unit 2 教参(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
封面 扉页 版权页 编写人员
前言（Foreword）
Unit 1 Friendship
教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
教学建议（Suggested teaching notes）
补充参考资料（Supplementary reference materials）
Teaching guide for the Student's Book（学生用书教学指导）
Teaching guide for the Workbook （练习册教学指导）
Unit 2 English around the world
教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
教学建议（Suggested teaching notes）
补充参考资料（Supplementary reference materials）
Teaching guide for the Student's Book（学生用书教学指导）
Teaching guide for the Workbook（练习册教学指导）
Unit 3 Travel journal
教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
教学建议（Suggested teaching notes）
补充参考资料（Supplementary reference materials）
Teaching guide for the Student's Book（学生用书教学指导）
Teaching guide for the Workbook （练习册教学指导）
Unit 4 Earthquakes
教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
教学建议（Suggested teaching notes）
补充参考资料（Supplementary reference materials）
Teaching guide for the Student's Book（学生用书教学指导）
Teaching guide for the Workbook （练习册教学指导）
Unit 5 Nelson Mandela - a modern hero
教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
教学建议（Suggested teaching notes）
补充参考资料（Supplementary reference materials）
Teaching guide for the Student's Book（学生用书教学指导）
Teaching guide for the Workbook（练习册教学指导）
Unit 1 Friendship
教学目的和要求
（Teaching aims and demands）
类别 课程标准要求掌握的项目
话
题 Friends and friendship; interpersonal relationships
词
汇 add point upset ignore calm concern loose cheat reason list share feeling Netherlands German series outdoors crazy nature purpose dare thunder entirely power according trust indoors suffer teenager advice questionnaire quiz situation editor communicate habit
add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away
set down a series of on purpose in order to face to face according to get along with
fall in love join in
功
能 1．态度（Attitudes）
Are you afraid that ...?
I've grown so crazy about ....
I didn't dare ....
2．同意和不同意（Agreement & disagreement）
I agree．I think so．Exactly．
I don't agree．I don't think so．I'm afraid not．
3．肯定程度（Certainty）
That's correct．Of course not．
语
法 直接引语和间接引语（I）：陈述句和疑问句
1．陈述句
“I don't want to set down a series of facts in a diary,” said Anne．
→ Anne said that she didn't want to set down a series of facts in a diary．
2．一般疑问句
He asked, “Are you leaving tonight?”
→ He asked us whether we were leaving that night．
3．特殊疑问句
“When did you go to bed last night?” Father said to Anne．
→ Father asked Anne when she went to bed the night before．
教学建议
（Suggested teaching notes）
一、教学内容分析
本单元的中心话题是“友谊”，几乎所有的内容都是围绕这一中心话题展开的。
“热身”（Warming Up）部分以调查问卷的形式引导学生了解日常生活中朋友之间发生的真实问题以及解决这些问题的方法。
“读前”（Pre-reading）部分的几个问题启发学生对“友谊”和“朋友”进行思考，使学生明确不仅人与人之间可以做朋友，日记也可以成为人们的朋友。
“阅读”（Reading）部分 ANNE'S BEST FRIEND以日记形式讲述了犹太女孩儿安妮的故事。二战中为躲避纳粹的迫害，她和家人不得不藏身于荷兰阿姆斯特丹的一个小阁楼里，不能与外界接触，周围又没有可以推心置腹、与之深谈的朋友。孤独之中她将日记作为朋友倾诉衷肠，在写日记的过程中寻求解决问题的办法。
“理解”（Comprehending）部分通过连句、多项选择和问答题的形式帮助学生对课文内容、细节进行更深入的理解。
“语言学习”（Learning about Language）部分教学本课重点词汇和重点语法项目。
“语言运用”（Using Language）部分的读两封信、听一段话、设计调查问卷、写信以及趣味写作，给学生提供了广阔空间去探讨友谊、友情，尤其是涉及到现实生活中被朋友误解、曲解，没有朋友的孤独寂寞等问题，既锻炼了学生的语言运用能力，又培养了学生发现问题、思考问题、解决问题的能力。
“小结”（Summing Up）部分引导学生从本单元的话题、词汇和语法等方面对所学内容进行总结 （参考教学目的和要求栏目）。
“学习建议”（Learning Tip）部分鼓励学生养成写日记的习惯。这样，一方面可以习得语言，另一方面还可以将日记作为自己的朋友表达感情与思想。
本单元所涉及的要点是：
（一）朋友是不是仅限于人类，朋友的真正含义，以及如何与人相处的问题。
（二）陈述句和疑问句的直接引语和间接引语。
（三）对于个人观点、态度的一些表达方法。
（四）本单元所出现词汇的用法。
二、教学方法建议
（一）关于友谊与朋友的讨论 一般人认为只有与人交朋友才算真正交朋友，本单元在读前阶段就提出问题，让学生思考是不是只有人与人之间才可以交朋友，然后在阅读中通过安妮的日记向学生说明我们也可以与动物及无生命的日记交朋友。在深刻理解、充分训练的基础上，可以再引导学生深入讨论几个与本单元话题有关的问题。例如：
1．描述朋友
示例：The teacher can ask students to describe one of their friends - their appearance, personality, hobbies, etc．
Sample description: I have a few good friends, but I think Miki is my best friend．We both read a lot and we're very interested in films．We spend a lot of time watching videos and talking about films and books．She works hard．She is very helpful．Whenever I am in trouble, she will help me out ....
2．结交网友
Sample questions: Have you made any friends over the Internet? / Do you have any epals? Do you think it's a good idea? / Do you agree that we should make friends over the Internet? Give your reasons．
Sample answers with reasons: Yes, I think so． / No, I don't think so．I agree ... because we can meet all kinds of people over the Internet． / I don't agree ... because you never know what kind of people you may meet over the Internet．
3．观点交流
示例：We all agree that to have a good friend, you need to be a good friend．
The teacher can write the statement on the blackboard and ask the students to have a group discussion．Ask them,”What do you think of this statement and how can you be a good friend?”
Students may have the following ideas and say,”That's right．（I agree．）If you want others to be kind to you, you should first be kind to them ....”OR“I don't think it is right．（I don't agree．）Sometimes if you are too kind to others, they may take advantage of you．
4．善交朋友
示例：The teacher may ask students to work in pairs or groups and list some qualities of a person they would like as a friend．
Students may list: honest, friendly, open-minded, generous, helpful, patient, good-tempered, trustworthy, careful, full of love, caring, responsible, interesting, brave, easygoing, outgoing, warm-hearted, kind, selfless, tolerant, intelligent ...
5．不善交朋友
示例：The teacher can then ask the students to list some qualities of a person who would not make a good friend．
Students may list: selfish, tricky, dishonest, bad-tempered, mean, impatient, narrow-minded, noisy, lazy, gossipy ...
6．朋友的重要性
示例：The teacher can ask the students to work in pairs and discuss with each other,”What is / are the most important quality / qualities that a friend needs to have?”
Students may have a dialogue like this:
S1: I think what is important for me is that a friend is always around when I need him / her．If I feel sad or upset, he / she will comfort me．He / She won't leave me alone when I'm in trouble．He / She will help me．
S2: I agree, but I think a real friend should also tell you the truth．He / She should tell you what she really thinks about things．
S1: That's right．He / She should also be able to share with me what he / she has．For example, when I need some books or something like that, he / she lends them to me．
以上活动仅供参考。教师在可能情况下还可以让学生用间接引语转述其他学生说的话。
例如：1．S1: I don't agree with you．
S2: Wang Ping said he didn't agree with you．
2．S1: Is money very important between friends?
S2: Li Kai asked if （whether）money was very important between friends．
（二）口语训练 开展本单元“语言运用”中的 Speaking 这项活动时，教师可根据实际情况组织学生按要求进行小组讨论。下面提供的例子，仅供参考。
A: Now let us design a questionnaire to find out what kind of friend one is．
B: OK．First we must think of four questions and three possible answers to each question．
A: What about the first question? Have you got one in mind?
B: Suppose your friend has taken away your book by mistake．What would you do or say to him / her?
A: That's a good question．Let me put it down．“Your friend has ....”
B: Then how about the three possible answers?
A: Well, the answer I think shoule be“You will ask your friend to be more careful next time．”
B: I agree．The worst choice would be”You will get upset and won't talk to him / her any more．”
A: All right．One more choice．Listen, I've got one．“You will ask your friend to return it to you．”
B: That's quite natural．How many points shall we give each choice?
A: The total score is two．The best should score two and the worst zero．
B: The third will score one．Shall we go on to the next question?
...
（三）阅读训练 阅读课文摘自《安妮日记》，讲述了安妮把日记作为朋友倾诉自己内心感受的一段故事。二十世纪四十年代纳粹德国统治欧洲大部分地区，德国纳粹政策之一是对犹太人残酷迫害，包括杀害、送到集中营强迫劳动、驱逐出欧洲等。教师应该让学生了解这段德国法西斯残害犹太人的历史，使学生在感受外国历史文化的同时自然而然地习得语言。只有了解当时的历史背景，才能理解她当时的心境和为什么将日记视为自己的朋友，才能深刻理解安妮日记的内涵。在此基础上，教师可引导学生对该文章进行全面整体理解，也可以给学生设置情景，引发他们的思考。例如：“如果你是安妮，你会怎么做？”“如果你三天不许出门，呆在一个小阁楼上，你会做什么？” 这样可以使学生通过体验学习，感悟语境、实践语言，以达到强化学生语言意识，积累语言经验的目的。
在此基础上请学生做“理解” （Comprehending）练习，效果会更好。在进行了较全面、深入的探究之后，学生已经将课文里的大部分内容融会贯通，消化理解。这阶段要尽量挖掘学生的学习潜能。让学生做学习的主人，学会自己解决问题。在交互学习、合作学习中，解决他们在理解课文的过程中产生的问题。通过讨论，发现和猜测文中生词、短语的意思。一些词、短语、难句、语法问题可以通过讨论得到解决。剩余的难点或学生讨论时忽略的重点，教师要及时补充。教师不要急于讲解课文、单词、短语、难句、语法等，要注意给学生提供充分的思维时间和空间，使学生的学习潜能得以最大限度的挖掘。
（四）词汇教学 本单元的一些单词和短语要针对学生的不同需要、不同层次、不同情况给予不同的指导和训练。教师可适当培养学生根据语篇、语境猜词的能力。比如：I don't want to set down a series of facts in a diary as most people do, but ... 先问学生他们一般写日记写什么，多数情况下如何写？学生会提出许多种日记的写法，其中可能有“流水账”写法。学生自然会猜到set down a series of facts应该是“记流水账”的意思。再如cheat一词的学习，引导学生读原句 You are taking your end-of-term exam．Your friend, who doesn't work hard, asks you to help him / her cheat in the exam by looking at your paper．让学生考虑不用功的学生在考试中请别人“帮忙”，看别人的试卷是什么行为，那一定是“欺骗、作弊”。所以，使用新教材教学生单词，一定要改变过去那种教师照字典讲讲讲，学生在课堂上记记记的做法。因为语言学习不只是传授性的，而且具有体验实践性，要引导学生自学、自做、自助、自悟，即指导学生形成自主学习意识，掌握合适的学习策略；激发学生的学习热情，让学生学会自己动手，收集信息、处理信息，用所学语言去实践。通过自学、自做解决问题，同时帮助其他同学解决问题，使学生在运用语言的过程中感悟体验所学语言的规律，培养语言意识，积累语言经验，形成语言感觉，达到语言运用的目的。
教师要根据学生的实际情况和需要进行讲解和操练。切忌面面俱到，照搬照抄。
（五）写的训练 本单元写作训练的设计十分有利于“任务型”教学。如：一位学生写给编辑的信，谈了自己没有朋友的烦恼，请编辑帮忙。这一训练要求学生以编辑的身份给这位学生写一封回信，并给出了一些写作指导和建议。我们可以看到，这个任务的设置既有真实语境支持，又有双向和交互特征。教师可以鼓励学生使用交际策略先用口语交谈，再写成文章。此处教师可根据学生情况安排一个任务。
例如：The teacher can ask students to work in pairs,”Imagine you are the student Xiaodong and your partner is the editor．Now you have a chance to talk to the‘editor'instead of writing to him．Make a dialogue with your partner．”
（六）语法教学 本单元的主要语法项目是陈述句、一般疑问句和特殊疑问句的直接引语和间接引语。学生用书和练习册中已有比较充分的练习。教师在教学中注意提醒学生不要死记硬背直接引语转换为间接引语的一些简单规则，而是要启发学生从实际出发，灵活掌握、运用规律。
例如：My friend says,”I will come here tomorrow．”如果用间接引语表示，有许多不同的表达方式。
如果此时此地，你来转述，应该说：
My friend says she（he） will come here tomorrow．
如果时间变了，地点不变，你来转述，应该说:
My friend said she （he）would come here the next day．
如果地点变了，时间还是今天，你来转述，应该说：
My friend said she （he）will go there tomorrow．
如果时间地点都变了，你来转述，应该说：
My friend said she （he）would go there the next day．
如果由别人转述，时间地点都变了，应该说：
He （She）said he （she）would go there the next day．
由此可以看出，使用直接引语和间接引语要注意具体语境。
三、自我评价建议
（一）非测试性评价
学生学完本单元后，通过练习册中的Checking yourself 进行自我评价，主要评价一下自己在本单元中的学习情况。对书中的内容是否感兴趣，有哪些收获，解决了什么问题，学习策略有什么改进，还有什么地方需要加强。同时，使学生加深对友谊、友情、朋友的理解，以及如何正确交友处友，对待友谊友情，处理朋友间发生的问题等。
下面的两项补充评价活动供教师在教学中参考使用。
自我评价 （1）最好用于期末：
Level - Senior 1 or 2
Time - 15-20 minutes
Materials - One copy of the questionnaire for each student
Questionnaire
WHAT LEARNING ACTIVITIES WERE MOST USEFUL TO YOU?
Number the following activities according to how much they helped you to learn English．（1 = most useful to you, 2 = useful to you, 3 = not useful to you）
Learning vocabulary lists by heart
Doing grammar exercises
Translating
Listening to people talking
Listening to tapes and answering questions
Listening to the radio or watching TV
Writing compositions or letters
Practising speaking with other people
Going to the language lab
Reading books or stories for pleasure □
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
Compare your answers with your partner and explain to each other why some activities are more useful to you．
自我评价 （2）主要用于本单元：
Read the following statements and then tick Yes or No to show your opinions upon friendship．
Yes No
1．Friendship is very important to me．□ □
2．I have a lot of friends．□ □
3．There can be true friendship between a schoolboy and a schoolgirl．□ □
4．I am very kind to my friends．□ □
5．I think everyone should have friends．□ □
6．Friends must have the same character．□ □
7．I keep a diary and think it is my close friend．□ □
8．When my friend is in trouble, I am always ready to help．□ □
9．I don't like to talk to others very much．I like to be alone．□ □
10．I keep a pet animal and treat it like a friend．□ □
（二）测试性评价
1．Complete the sentences using the words below in their proper forms．
add point ignore reason dare
suffer advice communicate power
1）Can you explain the ________ behind the decision?
2）Jane, who grows up in a circus, is able to ________ with all the animals．
3）After the earthquake, people hardly ________ hope that their families were still alive．
4）I ________ from a bad headache after the operation．
5）I followed my teacher's ________ and bought an English-English dictionary．
6）Parts of the city had ________ cuts yesterday because of the big fire from the restaurant．
7）Please ________ your daughter's name to this list．
8）Air pollution is one of the problems that we can't afford to ________．
9）There are five important ________ in her speech．
参考答案：
1）reasons 2）communicate 3）dared（to）
4）suffered / was suffering 5）advice
6）power 7）add 8）ignore 9）points
2．Complete the short passage using suitable phrases you learned from this unit．When you finish, try working out a surprising ending of the story with a partner．
Paul and I are good friends．We always ________ each other．He can ________ in his head quite easily, but I have to ________ all the numbers on paper for calculations．Last week Paul took me to a newly opened small pub．I ________ it as soon as I stepped in．It was such a nice place with all kinds of lovely candles．While we were chatting happily together, someone came near at our table．He asked politely,”Can I ________ ?”...
参考答案：
get along （well）with; add up; set down; fell in love with; join in
补充参考资料
（Supplementary reference materials）
补充注释
（一）词汇注释
1．add（v．）
1）to put together with something else so as to increase the number, size, importance, etc 增加，添加。
Please add something to what I've said, John．约翰，请对我说的话做点补充吧。
2）to join numbers, amount, etc so as to find the total 相加。
Add up these figures for me, please．请帮我把这些数字加起来。
add to something：to increase 增加。
What he did has added to our difficulties．他的所作所为增加了我们的困难。
add up to：to amount to 加起来等于；总计（达）。
The cost added up to 100 million yuan．费用总计达一亿元。
2．cheat
用作动词，表示
1）to act in a dishonest way in order to win 欺骗；作弊。
Any student caught cheating will have to leave the classroom．任何被发现作弊的学生将被赶出教室。
2）to take from （someone）in a dishonest way 骗；骗取。
They cheated the old woman （out）of her money by making her sign a document she didn't understand．他们让那老妇人在她不懂的文件上签字，骗了她的钱。
用作名词，表示
1）an act of cheating 作弊行为。
2）one who cheats 骗子。
3．go through
1）to examine carefully 仔细阅读或研究。
I went through the students?papers last night．昨晚我仔细阅读了学生的作业。
2）to experience 经历；遭受或忍受。
You really don't know what we went through while working on this project．你的确不知道我们搞这个项目吃了多少苦。
4．crazy （adj．）
1）mad, foolish 疯狂的，愚蠢的。
It's crazy to go out in such hot weather．在这么热的天出门，真是愚蠢。
2）wildly excited; very interested 狂热的，着迷的。
She is crazy about dancing．她对跳舞十分着迷。
5．lonely （v．）: unhappy because of being alone or without friends 孤独的，寂寞的。
He has been very lonely since his wife left him．妻子走后，他十分孤独。
lonely 与alone 的区别
alone （adj．）
1）without any friends or separated from others 单独的。
She lives alone．她独自一人生活。
2）only仅仅；只有。用于名词或代词之后。
The gloves alone cost $ 80．光是手套就花了80美元。
3）leave / let sb or sth alone：not take, touch or interfere with sb or sth 不带走；不触摸；不干涉某人或某事。
Leave that alone．It's mine．不要动，那是我的东西。
She has asked to be left alone．她要求不要打扰她。
6．be concerned about / for：be worried about 担心。
We're all concerned about her safety．我们都为她的安全担忧。
（二）难句解析
1．Your friend comes to school very upset．你的朋友来上学，心情非常不好。
1）upset （adj．）: worried; annoyed 不安的；心烦意乱的。
2）upset （vt．）: cause to worry, to be sad, to be angry, not to be calm, etc 使不安；使心烦意乱。
His cheating in the exam upset his teacher．他在考试中作弊，这使他的老师很生气。
2．Your friend, who doesn't work hard, asks you to help him / her cheat in the exam by looking at your paper．
这里的who doesn't work hard 是非限制性定语从句。整个句子可译成“你的朋友不用功。他要在考试中（偷）看你的试卷，（要你）帮他作弊。”
3．Do you want a friend whom you could tell everything to, like your deepest feelings and thoughts? 你是不是想有一位无话不谈能推心置腹的朋友呢？
whom you could tell everything to 是定语从句，修饰friend。
此处的 like 相当于such as。
He has learned some foreign languages, like （such as）French and German．他已学会了几门外语，如法语和德语。
4．I can well remember that ... 我记得非常清楚……
well n．井 adj．身体好 adv．好；非常 int．喔，噢，这个……
本课这句话中的well 是副词，意思是“非常、彻底、完全”（quite, much, thoroughly）。
George was well and truly drunk．乔治喝得烂醉。
I couldn't very well say no when there was no one else she could ask．她没有别人可以求助，我实在是无法拒绝她。
He finished the exam well within the time allowed．他在规定时间之前很早就做完了试卷。
5.... flowers could never have kept me spellbound．……鲜花从未令我心迷神往过。
spellbind （v．）: to hold the complete attention of 吸引人，迷人；使入迷。
The children watched spellbound as the magician took rabbits from his hat．当魔术师从他的帽子里变出兔子时，孩子们都看得入了迷。
Teaching guide for the Student's Book（学生用书教学指导）
INTRODUCTION
This unit looks at different kinds of friendship．Of course, the unit explores friendship between people but it gives particular attention to the friendship one can develop with oneself．In other words, it shows how a person can find comfort and support with an imaginary friend．In these readings from The Diary of Anne Frank, students will see how a lonely and frightened teenager copes with a very unusually stressful situation．She does this by confiding in Kitty, the name for her diary．She examines her problems and tries to find a way to deal with them．
PERSONS
Mr Frank Anne's father who once worked in a trade office
Mrs Frank Anne's mother who stayed at home to look after the family
Margot Anne's older sister who was very intelligent, studious, and quiet
Peter Son of another family who lived with the Franks in the attic
BACKGROUND
This is a true story．It took place in Amsterdam, Holland in the early 1940s after the German Nazis had occupied most of Europe．The Nazi Party ruled Germany from 1933 to 1945．One of their key policies was to kill all the Jews in Europe．If any persons known to be Jews were found, they would be sent to concentration camps farther east, mostly in Poland．Families were separated and transported in trains．For many days, they went without food, water, sanitation or fresh air．To avoid this terrible fate, some Jewish families went into hiding, often with the help of non-Jewish friends．This is what Anne's family did when Margot was told she must go to the railway station to be taken to a camp．Another Jewish family joined them in their hiding place in the attic of a house．It was very crowded there．Only three young people were there: Margot, Peter and, of course, Anne．Her diary shows that Anne felt she was the naughty one of the group since she was always being scolded．She felt she could not confide in Margot because her sister was always good．And she felt she could not confide in Peter because he was a boy．So she made a friend of her diary．Later, however, she did become closer to Peter and they took a liking to one another．Anne talks about their growing friendship in her diary．
______________________________________
SPECIAL NOTE: Many older houses in Amsterdam have more than one floor．The topmost floor is called an”attic? which is usually a place to store seldom-used things．Amsterdam is the capital of Holland, now more commonly called the Netherlands．The city lies near the sea and has many narrow man-made canals．The house where Anne's family hid was by a canal and bridge．Like most old houses in the city, it had two apartments on each floor: one set facing the canal and the other looking onto a garden．Anne's apartment faced the garden．Anne and her family hid there for over two years before they were discovered．They were taken to concentration camps in Poland where all of them died except Mr Frank．The house is now a museum for Anne．The primary school she attended in Amsterdam is now named after her．Every year she is remembered in a travelling exhibition that explains her life．
______________________________________
WARMING UP
The purpose of this part of the unit is to introduce the topic to the students in an interesting way．To “Warm up” means to do a bit of preparation for a large learning task．In particular, the students should begin to think about the topic．
This section of this unit begins with a survey．A survey is a way of finding out what people think and feel about a particular subject．This survey examines whether the students are good friends．In doing so, it should make them consider what qualities and behaviour make a good friend．This survey only considers a view of friendship common to people of the same age．It should be noted that this is the first of many activities designed for self-reflection in this textbook．
The following are suggestions for introducing the topic of this unit:
1 Get the students to make a list of three qualities a good friend should have．
2 Have students get into groups of four to find out what qualities each has listed．
3 Have a member of each group report on what their lists have in common and list them on the board．
4 Ask the class whether or not they agree with all the qualities listed．
5 Now have students do the survey in the textbook．
6 Have students look again at the list to see whether it should be revised．
Explanation of each item:
Question 1
This question deals with how thoughtful you are towards others．How much do you value your friend? Is it enough to help him / her? Would you change the time of the day you go to the cinema to fit in with him / her? The scoring reflects your concern for others．So one point for A gets the lowest score because it is the most selfish response．B gets the highest score because it shows a concern for your friend as well as your wish to go to see a film．C gets a slightly lower score because although it shows you want to go with your friend （because you change the plan）, you do not help your friend．
Question 2
This question is concerned with fairness．Is it fair for your friend to borrow something, break it and return it broken? A gets the lowest score because you are not giving your friend another chance to behave better this time．B gets a higher score because you let your friend borrow the camera again．This shows kindness and forgiveness for the trouble you had when it was returned broken．But you are not balancing his needs against your own．That is why C gets the highest score．You are showing your friend that you will trust him / her with the camera again but this time you are giving him / her rules in case it gets broken．
Question 3
This question deals with your concern for others．Should you make the troubles of your friend more important than your own responsibilities? A gets the lowest score because you would put anything else that needed to be done aside and concentrate only on your friend．This is not responsible．You have things that you need to do．Of course your friend is important but not more important than your responsibilities．B gets a higher score because it shows some concern for your friend and some understanding that you have important things to do too．But it does not show any real interest in his / her problem．C gets the highest score because it not only shows concern for your friend but a recognition that you have responsibilities too．
Question 4
This question is concerned with responsibilities to a friend．If you are asked to look after something and it is broken or harmed, what should you do? A provides the correct amount of responsibility to your friend．You recognize that it was your fault and will put it right and pay for the damage．So it gets the highest score．B provides some understanding that you are responsible．You put the situation right but you do not pay for the damage yourself．So it does not get the highest score．C gets the lowest score because you expect your friend to pay for your mistakes even though you were doing your friend a favour．
Question 5
This question is concerned with honesty．If you let your friend look at your paper or somebody else's paper, you are helping them to cheat．That is not honest, so answers A and C get no marks．But it takes courage to tell your friend that they should have studied and that they cannot look at your paper．That is also the honest answer．So you get 6 points for B, which is more than any
other in the quiz．
Results
4-7 points: You are not a good friend．You either neglect your friend's needs or just do what he / she wants you to do．You should think about what a good friend needs to do．Think more about this．
8-12 points: You are a good friend but you sometimes let your friendship become too important, or you fail to show enough concern for your friend's needs and feelings．Try to strike a balance between your friend's needs and your own responsibilities．
13+ points: You are an excellent friend who recognizes that to be a good friend you need to balance your needs and your friend's needs．Well done!
PRE-READING
The purpose of the pre-reading activity is to begin to focus students?attention on the main topic of the reading passage．It should not be regarded as an optional activity or as an activity to do after the reading．In other words, the pre-reading activity serves its own useful purpose．It prepares students to think critically about the topic and provides them with the opportunity to connect some aspect of the topic to their own lives．
READING
The reading introduces the students to Anne Frank after she had been in her hiding place for over a year．The part of the diary entry presented here reveals Anne's longing for a normal life．She especially missed going outside and enjoying nature．
1 Teaching new words and structures
The purpose of this step for teaching reading is to find the words and phrases that students find most difficult and help them to understand．Some of the more difficult words and phrases you will be able to pick out yourself, but some which seem easy to you may cause problems for your students．One way of helping them learn new words is to ask them to study the text before the lesson and find out the meaning of any word they are unsure of．The advantage of this is that the students will come prepared with any problems they have．You can then deal with these problems in the lesson and this is a very efficient way of identifying any student's misunderstandings．A second way of helping them is to choose the words you think they will find difficult and pre-teach them before you begin the reading．This approach is very effective for helping students to concentrate on the ideas of a reading passage and not worry about the meaning of unfamiliar words．
2 Understanding ideas
This is the purpose of the reading and so it is important that the students learn to use all the clues in the text to help them understand the gist of what they are reading．So encourage them to look at the pictures and the heading and guess what the text might be about．Then ask the class to read the passage silently．Sometimes you can ask them a question to focus their reading．It depends on the passage．When dealing with the story of Anne and her diary:
1 Help students imagine what it might be like if they had to stay in their bedroom for a whole year．They could not leave it even to go to the WC or get a cup of tea．How would they feel?
2 Ask students if they are only allowed to have five things with you in the hiding place because there is very little room, what would they choose?
3 Ask students to guess why the windows had to stay closed．
4 Consider what Anne means by the word “crazy.” In this context, “crazy” has the informal meaning of “enthusiastic” but its formal meaning is “mad.” However, be sure to give the students the chance to explore the possible meanings for this word before explaining it to them （if necessary）．
5 In the same way, ask the students to consider what “spellbound” means．In this context it means “to concentrate with delight for some time.”
Alternatively, you could ask students to tell you what is the main idea for each paragraph．Make sure that they do it in one sentence．This is very useful because it is making them analyze what is important and what is not．It also makes them produce a concise answer．
3 Discussion of ideas
This is where the students should discuss the ideas put forward in the reading passage．They should think whether they agree or disagree with the writer．It does not matter whether they agree or disagree．What is important is that they have a reason for what they say．So encourage them to put forward their own ideas, either criticizing the text or using it as a support．Think about:
1 What you would do if your family were going to be killed just because they did something the Emperor did not like?
2 Where would you plan to hide?
3 How would you arrange to get food given to you every day?
4 What would you do to pass the time?
4 Discussion of style
This is where the students begin to use the text to help their own writing．So it is important to ask the students:
1 What do you think is the purpose of this passage? Why did Anne write it?
2 Do you think it is successful? Do you understand Anne's feelings?
3 What is Anne's tone? In other words, is the author angry, sad, happy or thrilled?
4 What is Anne's point of view? Do you agree with it? If so, why? If not, why not?
The last question you should ask is about the quality of the language．So ask students if there are any phrases or sentences that they feel explain a situation or problem, or describe a person or place particularly well．This is a part of the lesson that you can share with your students．There are no right or wrong answers．It is a time to enjoy the reading together．
COMPREHENDING
These exercises are intended to encourage students to be active readers．In other words, they should read and work out the answers．Not all the information can be found in the reading but there are certain clues that students can use to provide an appropriate answer．In fact, the questions go beyond literal understanding to give students practice in making inferences．
Answer key for Exercise 1:
1 C 2 A 3 B 4 E 5 D
Answer key for Exercise 2:
1 B 2 C 3 D 4 A 5 C
Suggested answers to Exercise 3:
1 Students answers may vary but must include a reason．
2 You could describe Anne's feelings as sad and lonely．She realized what she was missing by going into hiding．
LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE
Discovering useful words and expressions
Answer key for Exercise 1:
1 trust 2 upset 3 loose
4 calm down 5 crazy 6 set down
7 go through 8 on purpose 9 face to face
10 according to
Answer key for Exercise 2:
1 upset 2 calm down 3 concerned about 4 trust
5 according to 6 crazy 7 go through
Answer key for Exercise 3:
1 concerned 2 purpose 3 entirely
4 outdoors 5 nature 6 thought
Answer key for Exercise 4:
1 ... you had to pay to get it repaired．
2 ... he / she will have to pay to get it repaired．
3 You will tell your friend that you've got to go to class．
4 ... but you have to go to class．
5 ... they had to hide or they would be caught by the German Nazis．
Discovering useful structures
Answer key for Exercise 2:
1 Anne said that she was going to hide from the Germans．
2 Anne said that she didn't know the address of her new home．
3 She said that she could not ask her father because it was not safe to know．
4 The girl said that she had to pack up her things very quickly．
5 Dad asked her why she chose her diary and old letters．
6 “Are you very hot with so many clothes on?”Mum asked her．
7 “What else have you got?”Margot asked her．
8 “When shall we go back home?”Anne asked her father．
9 “How can I see my friends?”Anne asked her sister．
10 “Why did you go to bed so late last night?”Mother asked Anne．
USING LANGUAGE
Reading, listening and writing
The purpose of this part of the unit is to provide the students with opportunities to practise the language in a variety of realistic communicative activities．Most of the activities in this section integrate （ie combine）at least two of the four skills - reading, listening, writing and speaking．Such activities encourage the students to use higher-order critical thinking skills （see Supplementary Teaching Resources）．Furthermore, the students are challenged not only in the cognitive but also in the affective and psychomotor domains of learning （see A Glossary of Selected Teaching Terms）．In the activity presented here, the students are given practice in writing a letter to the editor of a popular radio show．It helps the students to express feelings in a logical way．Just as importantly, it demonstrates how they can make a positive response to pressure from their classmates．
______________________________________
LISTENING TEXT
Dear Lisa,
There is nothing wrong with you and this boy being friends and studying together．And no matter what other students say, it is possible for a boy and a girl to be just good friends．Ending your friendship with this boy would be a stupid thing to do．Not only would you lose a good friend, but you would also lose someone who is helping you with your studies．
Teenagers like to gossip, and they often see something that doesn't exist．Perhaps they can't understand your friendship with this boy．But that's no reason to throw it away．You should feel sorry for those students who have never enjoyed such a friendship．My advice is to ignore your gossiping classmates．That way you will show them that you are more grown up than they are．
Yours,
Wang Fei
______________________________________
Suggested answers to Exercise 2:
1 She says that there is nothing wrong in Lisa making friends with a boy and that it is possible for a boy and a girl to be just good friends．
2 She thinks that Lisa would lose a good friend who can help her with her studies．
3 She says that teenagers like to gossip and that perhaps they can't understand Lisa's friendship with the boy．
4 She asks Lisa to ignore her gossiping classmates．
Answer key for Exercise 3:
1 stupid 2 reason 3 grown
Speaking
The purpose of this activity is to encourage independent thought and action in matters of immediate concern and interest to students．Writing their own survey gives them this chance．So it is important for each group to design its own questions．They may use the questionnaire in Warming Up as an example．
Sample dialogue:
A: Now let us design a questionnaire to find out what kind of friend one is．
B: OK．First we must think of four questions and three possible answers to each question．
C: What about the first question? Have you got one in mind?
D: Suppose your friend has taken away your book by mistake．What will you do or say to him / her?
C: That's a good question．Let me put it down．“Your friend has ... ”
B: Then how about the three possible answers?
A: Well, the answer I think should be “You will ask your friend to be more careful next time．”
D: I agree．The worst choice may be “You will get upset and won't talk to him / her any more．”
A: All right．One more choice．Listen, I've got one．“You will ask your friend to return it to you．”
B: That's quite natural．How many points shall we give each possible answer?
D: The highest score is two．The best should score two and the worst zero．
B: The third will score one．Shall we go on to the next question?
...
Reading and writing
This activity enables students to express their feelings and to help others．In other words, it gives students a better understanding of how to deal with this common situation．This is as much a role play as a writing activity, so it is important for students to discuss their ideas first．In this way they can collect their ideas, sort them out and prepare to write．
Sample writing:
Dear Xiaodong,
Some people like talking with others, but some people are shy．If you fall into the second group, it can be hard to make friends．But you can change the situation．
What are you interested in? If you like basketball, for example, you could talk with some of your classmates who like basketball．The easiest way to start talking to people is to find something you have in common．
If you are standing beside a group of your classmates, join in their discussion if you know something about the subject they are discussing．But if you don't, you shouldn't feel afraid to say, for example,”That sounds interesting, what is it about??Once you start talking to one person, it will get easier to talk to others．
Find one person you have something in common with, and once you become friends with him, his friends will start talking to you too．
Good luck!
Editor
SUMNING UP
To “Sum up” is to let students think about what they believe they have and have not learned．It should encourage self-reflection and taking responsibility for one's own learning．Of course, it also serves as a self-review．
When you check to see if your students have made a good summary, see the Teaching aims and demands in this unit．
LEARNING TIP
This section is intended to give students suggestions for further study on their own．It is hoped it will help students develop their learning strategies．
Teaching guide for the Workbook （练习册教学指导）
LISTENING
1 Read the incomplete passage to get prepared for the listening．
2 Listen to the passage and get the main idea．
3 Listen for the second time and fill in the gaps．
4 Check the answers in pairs．
5 Listen once again if necessary and check the answers with the whole class．
_____________________________________
LISTENING TEXT
Do you keep a diary? Is there anybody or anything so special to you that you would like to write it down? You may say to yourself,”I will put this away for now, but later in my life I will read it again and think about what happened to me when I was young．?Why do you wish to do this? Because you don't want to forget it, whether it is good or bad．You are afraid that you will not be able to remember what really happened or how you felt about it at the time．Most important, perhaps, you hope to keep your memories of the person, place or thing, especially if it changed your life．
That is why some of us put our thoughts into a diary．A diary is very personal．It is usually filled with writing that you want to keep only for yourself．In other words, you don't wish to share what you have written with anyone else．So, in a diary the writer and the reader are the same person - you．Sure, you might decide to share your secret thoughts and feelings with your best friend, but you will not read everything to her or him．A diary is often only interesting to the person who keeps it．Now you may have a better understanding of why Anne thought her diary a good friend to her．
_____________________________________
Answer key:
special; happened; were young; personal; feelings; why; thought
TALKING
1 Listen to what Leslie Clark, the Canadian, has to say about her experiences with friendship in China．
2 Ask the students in small groups to discuss whether they agree or disagree with her．
3 Then have the students take sides: at least one of them will support Leslie's viewpoint, and the rest will not support it．Tell the students to think about why they agree or disagree with Leslie．
_____________________________________
LISTENING TEXT
Leslie Clark, a Canadian from Vancouver, arrives in China to do some business in Luoyang, Henan Province．Her company sells buses．During her one-month stay she meets many Chinese people: officials, engineers, businessmen, store-owners, shop assistants, students, teachers, road workers and bus drivers．Most of these people try to make friends with her．A few of them invite her to dinners with delicious food and drink．They take her to visit interesting places and to a mountain in the countryside．She is given a comfortable room in the best hotel in town．Some people invite her to be their guest in their homes．Leslie is asked whether she thinks Chinese people are friendly．“Yes,” she says without a moment's thought,”I think Chinese are very friendly．?Everyone who asks her says that they are glad to hear it．However, when she got on the plane to fly home, another Canadian asks her,”S o, did you make any friends in China??Leslie replies, “Yes, I made some very good friends．But I'm really not sure about a few of the others, I think some of them just tried to be my friends for their own reasons．”
_____________________________________
Sample dialogue:
A: I agree with Leslie．What she said is true．In China, people are very friendly．
B: I'm afraid I can't agree with you．Some people are, but sometimes they make friends to get a job or to get to know important people．I want to have friends to share my thoughts and feelings with．I want us to care for each other．Whenever you are in trouble, you don't feel worried if you have your friends．And your friends can get help from you too if they need it．Isn't that being a good friend?
C: Exactly．A friend in need is a friend indeed．You can not just think of yourself, you must think about your friend's needs, interests and feelings．
A: That's correct．But some people do try to use a friend- ship to help them make a lot of money．You need friends in business and Leslie is in business．So she has to expect that some people are being nice to her to get some advantage for themselves．
B: Yes, of course．But a true friend will last and stay friends for many years．Leslie will just have to see if the Chinese friends she made will stay friends for a long time．Then she will know true Chinese friendship．
USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS
Answer key for Exercise 1:
1 trust; concerned; calm down; in order to
2 share; thoughts; upsets; feelings
3 on purpose
4 crazy; share; cheats
5 has gone through
Answer key for Exercise 2:
1 They hid there for almost two years and never dared go out．
2 We tried to calm him down, but he kept shouting．
3 Don't laugh at him．Sometimes you are not able to do as well as he （does）．
4 In the early 20th century, China went through too many wars．
5 The children haven't been outdoors （have been indoors）all day．Let them play outdoors for a while．
6 Please use the word to make a sentence according to the situation given．
7 This series of readers is very interesting．
8 The man saved the girl from the river and her mother was very grateful．
9 Mr Jones lives alone and often feels lonely．
10 We communicate with each other by Internet / through the Internet．
USING STRUCTURES
Suggested answers to Exercise 1:
Anne said that they went quickly upstairs and into the hiding place when they arrived at Prinsengracht．She said that they closed the door behind them and they were alone．She said （that）Margot had come faster on her bicycle and was already waiting for them．She said （that）all the rooms were full of boxes and they lay on the floor and the beds．She said （that）the little room was filled with bedclothes and they had to start clearing up at once, if they wished to sleep in comfortable beds that night．Anne said （that）her mother and Margot were not able to help．She said （that）they were tired and lay down on their beds, but her daddy and she, the two “Helpers” of the family, started at once．
Anne said （that）they unpacked the boxes, filled the cupboards and tidied the whole day, until they were extremely tired．She said they did sleep in clean beds that night．She said they hadn't had any warm food to eat all day, but they didn't care．Anne said （that）her mother and Margot were too tired and worried to eat, and her daddy and she were too busy．
LISTENING TASK
As we all know, students sometimes have difficult relationships with their parents．Anne was no different．She loved her father but she did not always follow his advice．She felt that he did not always understand her and was trying to protect her too much．She also wondered whether he worried too much about what other people thought．Anne felt she should be able to make her own friends and take responsibility for her choices．This was the problem she had with Peter．Her father felt she was too young to have a boy for a close friend．Anne felt Peter was the only person in the attic that she could talk to about her feelings．This listening passage describes how Anne tries to deal with this issue and the result of this conflict．
Teaching Suggestions:
1 Before listening to the tape, discuss with the students whether they always do what their parents tell them．Are there situations where they disagree with their parents? For example, a student may prefer to relax after dinner before doing his homework．However, his parents want him to do it right away．Or, a student may have a friend whom his / her parents do not like．He / She may not want to end the friendship but the parents may insist on it．If time permits, discuss further with students the consequences of disobeying their parents．In particular, ask them what their parents would do and what attitude they would have towards their parents．
2 Now have students listen to the passage．
3 After listening, have students discuss in small groups what they think Anne's father will do．
_____________________________________
LISTENING TEXT
On Saturday evening I asked Peter whether he thought I ought to tell Daddy about our friendship．When we'd discussed it a little, he decided that I should．I was glad, because it showed he was a good person．As soon as I got downstairs I went off with Daddy to get some water．While we were on the stairs I told him about Peter and my friendship．Daddy didn't reply right away and then he said,”I think you must be careful, Anne．We live so close together here．”On Sunday morning he called me and we talked about it again．“Anne, I have thought about what you said．I think you must not talk to him alone so often．This is a special situation．If you were outside like everyone else, you would see other boys and girls and you could do all kinds of other things．But here, you are a lot together and if you want to get away you can't．You see each other 24 hours a day - in fact all the time．? Then on Friday he showed he was not pleased with me．He had thought that after our talk on Sunday I would not go upstairs every evening．But I did not agree, so I continued to talk to Peter every evening．
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
SPECIAL NOTE: Anne, in fact, continued to see Peter but her father was quite upset．She wrote her father a letter to explain how she felt about Peter．Anne said that Peter was the only person she felt comfortable talking to about her feelings．In the letter, she also told her father that she felt her parents didn't show enough love for her and didn't trust her enough．Her father told her that it was the worst letter he had ever received in his life．She had been loved and cared for, Mr Frank insisted．Furthermore, he told Anne that they were only thinking of what was best for her．Anne felt ashamed and cried．Yet, Anne's father allowed her to continue to talk to Peter．In return, Anne assured her father that Peter and her would remain just good friends．
_____________________________________
2 Answers will vary．This could be developed into a class discussion．
Suggested answers to Exercise 1:
What Anne's father thought What Anne thought
about being friends with Peter She should be careful to make friends with Peter． She wanted her father to be happy for her to have a friend．
about talking to him every night He was unhappy． She wanted to continue．
about following her father's ideas He thought Anne would agree to stop seeing Peter so often． She thought her father was wrong．
Suggested answers to Exercise 2:
1 Everyone needs a friend．Anne needs a good friend．
2 They can talk together happily and they are not doing anything wrong．
3 They are always with the family, so her father can watch over her．
READING TASK
Although, friendship is valued in all cultures, it is often expressed in different ways．This is especially true in Hawaii, which prides itself on making friends with strangers．The word for friendship is “aloha,” but the word carries many meanings, depending on the situation in which it is used．For example, it can also mean “Goodbye.” The idea is to let others know that whether they are coming or going, they are always welcome．So the word”a loha?has as much to do with “friendliness”as friendship．
Hawaii is a unique place in many ways．The eight larger islands are farther away from the continents than any other islands in the Pacific Ocean．Yet they are home to rich cultural diversity．The first inhabitants were the Hawaiians, a people who sailed to these islands in wooden canoes centuries ago from another part of Polynesia．In the past 150 years, other peoples have come to live here from every East and Southeast Asian nation and most of the other islands in the Pacific Ocean．They have also come from North America and Western Europe．More importantly, Hawaii is a place where the East truly meets the West．The living and learning environment of these beautiful islands mixes the best of both worlds．This coming together of cultures happens in the schools, in business and in government．It also happens in families: most of the people are multi-racial, that is, from many races．No racial or ethnic group is a majority, either, which makes Hawaii the only state in the US with this special situation．To be Hawaiian nowadays is to be part of a new culture that is open to change．
Teaching Suggestions:
1 Before they read the passage, ask students if they can think of any place in the world where Chinese and Western cultures live side by side．Places they might mention include Hong Kong, Macao, Singapore, the Philippines, San Francisco and Vancouver．Ask them to describe what they imagine life to be like in such a place．
2 Now have students read the passage．
3 After they read it, have students talk with a partner and consider how the Hawaiian idea of friendship could help different peoples to get along with one another．Besides friendship, you may want to have students think of another way to communicate better with people from other cultures．
Suggested answers to Exercise 1:
aloha to be with happiness / goodbye / our hearts singing together lokahi oneness with all people
kokua help ohana family
lei a circle of flowers worn around the neck
Suggested answers to Exercise 2:
1 Hawaiians say “aloha” to each other to show friend-ship．
2 They welcome people of all races, languages and cultures with “lokahi” which means “oneness with all people”.
3 They give visitors a “lei” to make them feel at home．
4 It's because Hawaii is a place where many cultures live together peacefully and co-operate with each other．
5 They try to help each other so that all feel stronger．People are told that their actions should be as gentle as the wind blowing from the sea．
6 They solve the problems with understanding and treat all people as if they are part of the same family．
7 Students'answers will vary．
SPEAKING TASK
The purpose of this task is to provide students with communicative practice．The students are put into situations that involve moral choices and could happen to anyone．These situations do not have a clearly right or wrong choice．Rather, their importance lies in the ideas produced during the discussion．
Teaching Suggestions:
1 In pairs, have the students read the situations and choose one to discuss．
2 After each pair comes to an agreement, have them record their solution to the problem on a piece of paper and give it to you．
3 Put pairs that have different solutions to the same situation in groups of four．
4 Let them present their reasons to each other about what to do and try to come to an agreement about the best course of action．
5 Have a student from each group report their new solution to the class．
6 If time permits, ask the students to work in pairs and make a dialogue like the following．
Sample dialogue:
S1: Hello, Liu Ming．How are you? I have something to discuss with you．I feel very uncomfortable about this but I think we must talk about it．I have been offered a ticket to a concert of the”Backstreet Boys?
S2: Wow! That's wonderful! I know how much you like them and how much you have always wanted to go to one of their concerts．Is there any chance I might get a ticket too?
S1: I am so sorry．They are only staying here for one night and Shen Ming offered me one．There was only one, or of course I would have thought of you．
S2: When are they coming? Perhaps I can queue up with you to get their autographs?
S1: That's just what I wanted to say．The concert is on Saturday．
S2: Oh I see．You want to change our arrangement for the picnic．Well, as a matter of fact I cannot go either on Saturday．My cousin is coming over and we shall have to visit my aunt．
S1: So it all turned out for the best．Thank goodness!
WRITING TASK
The purpose of this task is to involve the students in a critical thinking process．The students are provided with a list of proverbs about friends and friendship．These may help them to better understand how differently people see friends．It also gives them a chance to express their own views on friends and friendship．Make sure the students understand the meaning of the proverbs before they start to write．
Sample writing:
I don't agree with all the proverbs about friends or friendship．I agree with the following ones:
1 The same man cannot be both friend and flatterer．
2 Walking with a friend in the dark is better than walking alone in the light．
3 Friendship cannot stand always on one side．
I think a person can praise, blame, scold but shouldn't flatter his / her friend（s）．A friend is a treasure to his / her friend（s）．Friends should help each other and share their joys and sorrows-true friendship isn't one-sided．
I disagree with the following ones:
1 A friend in need is a friend indeed．
2 Friends are like wine; the older, the better．
3 With clothes the new are the best; with friends the old are the best．
In my opinion, a friend is a friend．There should be no such terms as true friend or false friend．I think a false friend cannot be a friend at all．I also think that a new friend is as good as an old one．A friend, new or old, is a friend．He / She is always devoted and helpful to his / her friend．
* PROJECT
Friendship is such a popular topic that there are lots of stories, songs, poems and plays about it．After learning this unit, the students should be encouraged to collect as much material on this subject as they can from the library, media and the Internet．They may hold an English party, where they can put on performances, eg reciting poems, singing songs, telling stories, etc．This is a good way to increase the students?interest in learning English as well as enhance their understanding of friendship．
CHECKING YOURSELF
This part aims at encouraging students to make a self-assessment after they finish learning each unit．The questions in the Workbook may help them．They should check to see:
● what experience, skill and knowledge they have obtained;
● if their interest has increased or decreased;
● if they are using effective ways of learning;
● what problems they have and what solutions they have found, etc．
First get the students to think about these questions individually．Then they can discuss in groups sharing their experience．You can join in and give them advice and suggestions where necessary．
Enrichment
NOTE
PERSONS
Anne Frank was born on June 12, 1929 in Frankfurt, Germany．At that time the Jewish community was a key part of the city's economic and cultural success．Her father, Otto Frank, was a respected businessman whose ancestors first came to the city centuries before．His family lived in a comfortable five-room flat and Anne was raised with loving concern and great care．In the spring of 1934, a year after Hitler rose to power, the family moved to Holland, whose people welcomed them．
After the German invasion of 1940, Anne was forced to leave her school, as were all known Jews．Almost right away, the Gestapo began to send thousands of Dutch resisters to slave labour camps in Germany．Then in February 1941 the Gestapo began to arrest Jews．It was at this moment that Otto Frank made plans to hide his family．
For the next 25 months the Franks and another family, the Van Daans, stayed on the top floor, curtains drawn so as not to attract unwanted attention．Sadly, a Dutch employee in the office told the Gestapo of the whereabouts of the families．Finally, they were arrested．They were in one of the last groups of Jews to be taken to the camps．Anne's mother got very ill at Auschwitz in Poland and stayed behind when Anne, her sister, and Mrs Van Daan were moved to Belsen, a smaller camp in Germany．Peter, who was in better health than the others, was forced into a long march from the camp where he disappeared．When Margot died in March, 1945, Anne probably lost her desire to live．She died just before her 16th birthday and less than a month before the surviving Jews were liberated by American, British, Canadian and Russian soldiers．
BACKGROUND
The building in Amsterdam where Anne Frank's family hid was not a set of apartments but a small business office with storage rooms．Therefore, people were not expected to come and go from it except during regular business hours．This expectation made it all the more difficult for the Franks to receive visitors．Thus it was that during the day the lower floors continued to serve as a place of business．After working hours, the Frank's Dutch friends brought them food, clothing, news from the outside world, and a bit of comfort．When the German Army conquered Holland in the spring of 1940, it soon sent its secret police, the Gestapo, into the peace-loving nation to search for Dutch Jews．Over the next four and a half years more than 100, 000 Dutch Jews were sent to concentration camps in eastern Germany and western Poland．The Frank family was among them．
FURTHER READING
The following passage is an excerpt, or part, of one of the longest and last entries in Anne Frank's diary．It can be used with both whole classes and individual students who show a keen interest in the unit topic．It is not necessary to provide additional background information to students before using this reading passage．
A DIARY ENTRY OF ANNE
Saturday, 15 July, 1944
“For in its innermost depths youth is lonelier than old age.” I read this saying in some book and I've always remembered it, and found it to be true．Is it true then that grownups have a more difficult time here than we do? No．I know it isn't．Older people have formed their opinions about everything, and don't waver before they act．It's twice as hard for us young ones to hold our ground, and maintain our opinions ...
Anyone who claims that the older ones have a more difficult time here certainly doesn't realize to what extent our problems weigh down on us, problems for which we are probably much too young, but which [are continuous], until, after a long time, we think we've found a solution, but the solution doesn't seem able to resist the facts which [put] it to nothing again．That's the difficulty in these times: ideals, dreams, and cher
篇15：新课标必修1 unit 4 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Unit 4 Earthquakes
Part One : word
1. shake
【用法指南】
1) vt. 摇动，使摇动 2) vi （ 指人、嗓音）发抖，打颤
3） vt.使人心绪不宁
【典型例句】
The teacher shook the boy by the shoulders
the poor boy was shaking with cold
The house shook as the heavy truck went past
His lying shook my faith in him.
【拓展】
shake with… 因。。。而颤抖
shake hands with sb. 与某人握手
shake sb. by the hand ＝shake one’s hand
shake one’s head 摇头表示不同意
nod one’s head 点头表示同意
【过关练习1】
1)The frightened boy said to his mother in a ___ voice.
A. trembled B. shaken
C. trembling D. shook
2) He is shaking hands ____ my father.
A. to B. of C. with D. at
2．rise
【用法指南】
1）vi. (太阳，月亮等)升起；升高；上升；上涨；起床
2）n. 升起；升高
3) rise to one’s feet 站起来
4）give rise to 引起， 导致
5) give sb. a rise给某人涨工资
【典型例句】
The sun rises in the east and sets in the west .
The river is rising after the train.
Prices have risen steadily during the past decade
The rise in the house rent has added to our difficulties.
【类比延伸】
1） rise 为不及物动词，作“上升”时指继续上升，常用于日，月，云，烟、物价、温度、河水、潮水及人的职位等。
raise 为及物动词，意为“举起、提出、饲养、种植”；用作“举起”时，有使物体达到应有的高度的含义。
【过关练习2】
1) They ____ their glasses _____ the friendship between the two nations.
A. look; for B. raised; to C. raised; for D. life; to
用rise和raise的正确形式填空
2) He’s used to _____ early in the morning
3) His funny story ____ a lot of laughter.
4) Prices _____ surprisingly since last year.
5) The level of the water in the river ____ after the heavy rain.
3． smelly]
【用法指南】
1）adj. 发臭的，难闻的
2） smelly 是一个派生词 即smell (n) +y(后缀)。类似的如：
blood--- bloody cloud--- cloudy
rain----- rainy wind---- windy
greed--- greedy sun ---sunny
fog --- foggy fat--- fatty mud--- muddy
【过关练习3】
用所给单词的正确形式填空
1)．He had a ____( blood )nose.
2.) Today is a ____ (wind) day.
3. )He looked at the cake with ____ (greed )eyes
4) ____ (fog) weather is common here.
5) The roads are _____ (mud)
6) This is a _____ (sun) room.
4. ruin
【用法指南】
1） vt. 毁坏，毁灭，使毁坏
2） n. 毁灭，破产
3） in ruins 成为废墟； 遭到严重破坏
【典型例句】
An earthquake left the whole town in ruins.
She poured water all over my painting , and ruined it.
This island has been ruined by tourism
I was ruined by that law case
【类比延伸】
1） ruin 一次性、彻底的毁坏（ 不含有某种摧毁性的力量进行破坏的意思）； 通常暗指无可挽回的伤害，但不一定指完全毁灭（含有在一定的过程种逐渐毁掉的意思）。此外，ruin多用于借喻中，泛指一般的“坏了”
2） harm指对人或物的伤害或损坏，身体或心理上的伤害。
3） destroy强调以具有摧毁或杀伤性的力量把某物彻底毁掉； 有时用于比喻，意为“打破（希望， 计划）， 使失败
4） damage损失，损坏； 多用于无生命的东西，指“价值、用途降低或外表损坏等，不一定全部破坏，损坏了还可以修复； 这种是自然灾害或人为过失造成的。
【过关练习4】
1). Mike didn’t play football yesterday because he had ____ his leg.
A. damaged B. hurt C. hit D. struck
2) the building is _____.
A. under ruin B. in ruins C. under ruins D. in ruin
用ruin, damage , harm, destroy的正确形式填空
3)．Getting up early won’t ___ you.
4.) The fire ____ most of the building
5. )The crops are all ___ by the continuous rain
6) A falling tree ____ the roof and we should repair it.
5． shock
【用法指南】
1）vt. 使。。。震惊； 使。。。激怒
2） n. 震动，震惊，电击
【典型例句】
I was shocked when I heard about your accident
My father was shocked
The shock of the explosion was felt far away.
the two t rains met and the shock broke the windows
it was a great shock for him when his wife died.
An electric shock can kill you
【拓展】
1) in shock
2) get a shock from a wire
【过关练习5】
1) All of the people present felt _____ at the _____ news.
A. shocked; shocking B. shocking; shocked
C. shocking; shocking D. shocked ; shocked
2) Hw was shocked _____ his son playing all day.
A. knowing B. to know C. at know D. known.
用shock的正确形式填空
3) I felt the ______ as the aircraft hit the ground.
4) He was _____ to hear his child swearing.
5). The news of his mother’s death was a terrible ____ to him.
6. rescue
【用法指南】
1）n. 营救，救出
2）v. 营救，救出（常与 from连用）
【典型例句】
We rescued the boy who fell into the river.
However , rescue operations are proving difficult
【拓展】
1） rescuer n, 援救者，营救者
2） come to someone’s rescue 来/去援救某人
【过关练习6】
完成句子
1)． The soldier ____ a boy ____ drowning
这个战士把溺水的男孩救了起来。
2) Researchers ______ in the mountains
搜救者救出了在山中迷失的人们
3) The ______ in a week.
营救队一星期内进行了10次援救
4. ) They must come _____ our rescue.
A. to B. at C. of D. from.
7． honour
【用法指南】
1）n. 荣誉，名誉； 使人感倒光荣的人、事
2）vt. 尊敬； 给予荣誉
【典型例句】
It’s a great honour to have the President to visit our town.
They stood in silence as a mark of honour to her
She is an honour to her family.
Today the President is hounourin us with his presence.
I feel highly honoured by your trust
【拓展】
1） in honour of = show respect to…
2） show honour to sb.
3） a sense of honour to sb.
4） do honour to
5） on /Upon one’s honour
【过关练习7】
1. )It is _____ honour to her you speak so highly of me.
A. / B. at C. the D. a
2.) All of the village came out to receive me an ____ guest.
A. honour B. honouring C. honoured D. honours
3) I feel highly _____ the kind things you say about me.
A. honoured for B. honour for C. honoured by D. honour by
4) My sister was against my suggestion while my brother was _____ it .
A. in favour of B. in memory of
C. in honour of D. in search of
Part two Phrase
1 a (great) number of
1)许多，大量的
2）后接可数名词复数
3）谓语动词用复数
【典型例句】
I have read a great number of books on this subject.
A great number of visitors come to China every year.
【类比延伸】
1) the number of ：是“。。。的数目“ 的意思，谓语动词用单数
The number of private colleges has increased.
2) a number of 是“许多，大量“的意思。后接可数名词，谓语动词用复数。
A large number of students are going to visit the U.S. A.
【过关练习1】
1) The number of people invited ____ fifty , but a number of them _____ absent for different reason.
A. were; was B. was; was C. was; were D. were; were
2) ____ of people came to the meeting from all over the country.
A. Many B. A number C. The number D. A plenty of
3) ____ of the students in our school has increased to 300
A. A great number B.A great many
C. Plenty of D. the number
2. give out
【用法指南】
1) 及物动词用法，意为“分发，散发，发出（光、热声）
2) 不及物动词用法，意为“用尽、耗尽”
【典型例句】
His money soon gave out
The teacher gave out the exam papers to the students
The flowers gave out a sweet perfume
The machine gives out flashes of light
【拓展】
give out 当“分发”讲时与hand out同义
give off 也有“发光，烟、气味”之意
【过关练习2】
1) the moon gives ____ no light of its own.
A. off B. of C. with D. at
2) After the long-distance race, the woman athlete’s legs almost ____ under her.
A. gave out B. gave in C. gave up D. gave away
Part three: structure
1. Now imagine there has been a big earthquake.
【句型概况】
本句是一个祈使句，在动词imagine 后使用一个 there be句型充当imagine的宾语。There be句型表示“某个事物”在“什么地方”，其结构为“There + be + 主语＋其他成分”. 谓语动词按照救近一致原则。
【典型例句】
There is a desk and three chairs in the room.
There are three chairs and a desk in the room.
There is an old man living in the forest.
【拓展】
1） there be句型中 ，be 还可被live, stand, lie, exist
There stands a big tree on the top of the house.
There lies a large wheat field in front of the house..
2） there be句型中容易出错的地方
There has a baby over there. (错)
there is a baby is crying over there. （错）
【过关练习1】
1) there _____ a film in the hall this afternoon.
A. is going to have B. will have
C. will to be D. is going to be
2) There used to be a high tower here, ______?
A. wasn’t there B. wasn’t there C. usedn’t there D. used there
3) – there isn’t any milk left
-- oh, _____ ? I’ll get some in town. I’m going there later on
A. isn’t it B. isn’t there C. is there D. is it
4) --- You’ve booked on a four o’clock flight.
--- What chance ____ of taking an earlier plane?
A. there is B. is it C. there it is D. is there
5) Brain told you that there wasn’t anyone in the room at that time , ____ ?
A. was there B. wasn’t there C. didn’t he D. did he
2．Mice ran out of the field looking for places to hide.
【句型概况】
looking for places to hide 为现在分词短语，在句中作伴随状语，表示一个与谓语动词ran同时发生的动作，其逻辑主语为句子的主语，二者之间构成主谓关系。
【典型例句】
He sat by the desk, doing his homework.
He put a finger in his mouth , tasted it and smiled, looking pleased.
One woman was lying in bed , awake, listening to the rushing winds.
【拓展】
现在分词（短语）作时间、原因、条件、让步状语时，多位于句首；作结果、方式或伴随状语时， 通常位于句末。
(While) Working in the desk, doing his homework.(时间状语)
Being too old, he couldn’t walk that far. （原因状语)）
standing on the building, you can see the whole city. (条件状语)
Though raining heavily, it cleared up very soon.（让步状语)
He dropped the glass, breaking in into pieces. （结果状语)
They started his breath using a mouth-to-mouth way.（方式结果）
【过关练习2】
1) “We can’t go out in this weather,” said Bob, ____ out of the window.
A. looking B. to look C. looked D. Having looked
2) the visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with the talk, ____ that he had enjoyed his stay here.
A. having added B. to add C. adding D. added
3) My cousin came to see me from the country, ____ me a full basket of fresh fruits.
A. brought B. bringing C. to bring D. had brought
4) “ Can’t you read?” Mary said ___ to the notice.
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily
C. angrily pointed D. and angrily pointing
5) she set out soon after dark ____ home an hour later.
A. arriving B. to arrive having arrived D. and arrived
3． All hope was not lost.
【句型概况】
该句为部分否定。 all, both, everyone, everybody, everything以及“every+名词”都表示全部肯定； no one, none, nobody, nothing, not … any, 以及no+名词”都表示全部否定； 但当not出现在含有表示全部肯定的不定代词的句子中， 不管 not在它们之前或之后都表示部分否定。
【典型例句】
Both of them haven’t read this story.
All of the boy are clever, but none of them can work out this problem.
All bamboo grows tall, but some doesn’t.
【拓展】
1) any所修饰的名词或由any构成的复合不定代词作主语时， 谓语动词不能用否定时式。即只能说not… any,不能说any … not
2) 总括性副词如everywhere , always , altogether(全然地), wholly（全部地）和not连用时,也表示部分否定。
Such a thing can’t be found everywhere.
【过关练习3】
1. we couldn’t eat in a restaurant because ____ of us had _____ money.
A. all; not B. any; no C. none; any D. no one ; any
2) I agree with most of what you said , but I don’t agree with ______.
A. everything B. anything C. something D. nothing
3) _____ seen the film, so everyone wants to see it.
A. All the students haven’t B. Any students haven’t
C. As nobody has D. None of us has
篇16：新课标必修1 unit 3 语言知识讲义(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Part One : word
1. finally
【用法指南】
1) adv.终于，最终
2) adv.（用于列举）最后
3) adv.彻底地，决定性地
【典型例句】
I finally managed to get her attention
我终于设法引起了他的注意
And finally, I would like to thank you all for coming here.
最后，我感谢大家的光临
The matter was not finally settled until much later.
这事很久以后才彻底解决。
【拓展】
final adj. 最后的，最终的，决定性的
【类比延伸】
1) finally 强调活动过程地终结，译作“最后”； 在列举事物或论点时，可用来引出最后一项内容；用在句中动词地前面，表示“等了好久才。。。” 如：she finally agreed with me.
2) at last 强调耽误很久之后才。。。； 感情色彩浓重，如不耐烦，不放心，不如愿等。如：At last firemen have put out a big forest in California.
3) in the end 表示经过许多变化、困难或捉摸不定地情况之后才发生。相当于at last 和finally。但 finally 一般位于谓语前，其他二个既可以用在谓语前，也可位于谓语后。注意： at the end 表示最后，可用于预卜未来。如：
In the end, we stay at home and look after everything.
【过关练习1】
1) Four policemen rode past on their motorbikes, then came the television broadcasting car, and ______ the marathon runners.
A. at the last B. in the end C. finally D. to the final
2) He stopped at the gate and took a(n) _____ look at his familiar schoolyard as if to impress it deeply on his mind.
A. last B. final C. ending D. over
3) _____ the finals, Hungary beat Spain ____ 120.
A. At; at B. By; at C. With; by D. At; by
4) He went into the class, found a seat at the _____ of the classroom and sat down.
A. final B. back C. behind D. last
5) We won the ____ victory against the Japanese invaders in 1945.
A. last B. final C. latest D. late
2. persuade
【用法指南】
1) vt. 劝说；说服
2) vt. 使信服，使相信
【典型例句】
He persuaded her to go to school, even though she did not want to.
They persuaded us into / out of going to the party.
他们劝说我们去/不去参加聚会
She was not persuaded of the truth of his statement.
她没有被说服相信他的话是真的。
How can I persuade you that I am sincere?
怎样才能使你相信我是真信实意的呢？
【拓展】
1） persuade sb. into/ out of (doing) sth. 说服或劝说某人（不）要做某事
2） persuade sb. that clause 使某人相信某事；使某人信服
3） persuade sb of sth. 使某人相信某事物；使某人信服
【类比延伸】
1) persuade ; advise
persuade 表示用理由，建议或个人说服力来战胜某人； persuade强调“劝说”已收到成效。 而advise并不涉及是否有效，甚至很可能说而不服
2） persuade; convince
根据一条习惯规则， 一个人persuade（说服）某人做某事； 而convince (使确信)某人相信一句话或一个提议地正确性。
【过关练习2】
1） －He still smokes a lot , do you know?
－ Yes . But I don’t know how I can ______ him to give it up.
A. advise B. try to persuade C. persuade D. suggest
2) While shopping , people sometimes can’t help ____ into buying something they don’t really need.
A. to persuade B. persuading
C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
3) Alice trusts you; Only you can ___ her to give up the foolish idea.
A. suggest B. attract C. tempt D. persuade
4) I had ____ him not to stay up late, but he still didn’t go to bed until midnight.
A. persuaded B. advised C. promised D. suggested
5) – Have you ___ your brother to give up smoking ?
-- No. I talked to him yesterday but he would have none of my advice.
A. persuaded B. advised C. promised D. suggested
3. insist
【用法指南】
v． 主张；坚持，坚持主张，常与 on连用，或后接that从句
【典型例句】
I insisted that he was wrong
I insist on your being there.
我坚持要你在那里
We all insist that we not rest until we finish the work.
大家都坚持要求不完工就不休息。
【拓展】
1） insist表示“坚持要求”时，其后地宾语从句采用虚拟语气； 表示“坚持认为，坚持说”时， 其后地宾语从句采用陈述语气。
I insisted he go to see a doctor, but he insisted nothing was wrong with him.
I insisted that a doctor be sent for immediately.
2) 在ask, suggest, order, demand, propose, insist, request, advise , desire, require, prefer等后面的宾语从句采用虚拟语气结构。
【过关练习3】
1） We insist that a meeting _____ as soon as possible.
A. be held B. will held C. is held D. would hold
2) I insisted that a doctor ______ immediately.
A. has been sent for B. sends for
C. will be sent for D. be sent for
3) The lady insisted that the young man ____ her wallet and insisted on ____ to the police station at once.
A. had stolen; be sent B. should steal ; sending him
C. had stolen; his being sent D. should steal; sending
4. determine
1) vt. 查明，测定
2）vt. 决定，影响
3）vt. 确定，安排
【典型例句】
We set out to determine exactly what happened that night.
我们着手调查那天晚上发生的事情
Age and experience will be determining factors in our choice of candidate.
年龄和经验是我们选择候选人的决定性因素。
A date for the meeting has yet not be determined.
会议日前尚待确定
【拓展】
下定决心干某事:
determine to do sth,
be determined to do sth,
decide to do sth.
make up one’s mind to do sth
make a decision to do sth
【类比延伸】
determine to do 和be determined to do 都表示“决定干某事”， 前者强调动作， 后者表示状态。determine是瞬间动词，不能和时间段连用；而be determined 表示一种状态，可与时间段连用。
如：he was determined to do it for a long time.
【过关练习4】
1） She is a/an _____ woman who always gets what she wants.
A. experienced B. absent – minded
C. determined D. easy- going
2) we are determined ____ the task finished before the end of this month.
A. to get B. get C. getting D. to have get
3) ______ to give up smoking , he threw away his ____ cigarettes.
A. Determined; remained B. . Determined; remaining
C. Determining; remained D. Determining; remaining
4) I left him , ______ never to come back again.
A. being determined B. was determined
C. determining D. determined
Part Two : phrase
1. change one’s mind
【用法指南】
动词词组, 意为“改变注意”
【典型例句】
Tom has changed his mind
Once you have made a decision, you had better not change your mind.
【拓展】
1) turn one’s mind/ thoughts/ attention 把自己的心智、思想、注意力贯注在某事上
2) make up one’s mind 决定， 下定决心
3) keep sth. in mind 记住
4) read one’s mind 看透某人的心思
5) lose one’s mind 发疯
6) out of one’s mind 不理智，发疯
7) keep one’s mind on sth. 把注意力放在。。。
8) come into one’s mind 突然想到
9) speak one’s mind 直言不讳
10) fix one’s mind upon 专心于，专注于
【过关练习1】
1） No matter what you do, you should put your ____ into it.
A. mind B. heart C. brain D. thought
2) Once he has _____, nothing can change his mind.
A. made up his mind B. decided his mind
C. determined his mind D. made his mind
3) He offered me just what I dreamed about as if he has been able to ______ my mind.
A. read B. have C. make up D. change
2. give in
【用法指南】
1) vt. 让步； 投降，屈服
2) vt. 提交， 呈送
【典型例句】
The boys fought until one gave in.
Don’t give in to him
She gave in her report
【拓展】
1） give away 赠送， 给予； 揭发， 泄漏
2） give back 归还
3） give off 放出；散发出（液体、气体、气味、热能、光、声音）
4） give out 分发； 用完，消耗
5） give up 放弃
【典型例句】
He tried to pretend that he wasn’t worried , but his shaking hands gave him away.
他使尽装作不担心的样子，但他抖动的双手暴露了真情
Gave my book back to me.
The cooker is giving off a funny smell.
锅里冒出一阵怪味
After a month their food supplies gave out.
过了一个月，他们食物已消耗殆尽。
She doesn’t give up easily.
她做任何事都不轻易放弃。
【过关练习2】
1) Although Jane agrees with me on most points, here was one on which she was unwilling to______.
A. give up B. give in C. give away D. give off
2) – Smoking is bad for your health.
-- Yes, I know. But I simple can’t ______.
A. give it up B. give it in
C. give it out D. give it away
3) What shall we use for power when all the oil in the world has______?
A. given out B. put out C. held up D. used up
Part three: Structure
1. It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.
【句型概况】
1） 被强调部分若为指人的名词或代词，用that或who（强调宾语，可用whom）; 被强调部分若为指物的名词或代词，用that。 强调句型应避免使用when, where ,which等连词
2） that / who后的动词的人称和数的变化要与前面的名词或代词一致。
3） be在句型中总是单数形式
4） be在句型不能用来强调谓语动词。
5） 感叹句的强调句型，如：
How serious it is that he looks!
6） 强调句型的疑问形式
How many people is it that are being trained for the special work.
Was it in the street that you met him.
7) 强调句型中的特殊形式
It is not until……
It is because … that….
【过关练习1】
1） It is what you rather than what you say _____ matters (天津)
A. that B. what C. which D. this
2） It was only with the help of the local guide ____.
A. was the mountain climber rescued
B. that the mountain climber was rescued
C. when the mountain climber was rescued
D. then the mountain climber was rescued
3) Why ! I have nothing to confess. _____ you want me to say?
A. What is it that B. What it is that
C. How is it that D. How it is that
2. Once she has made up her mind , nothing can change it.
【句型概况】
once此处为连词， 意为“一旦”， 引导条件状语从句
【典型例句】
Once printed, this dictionary will be very popular .
【拓展】once还可用作名词， 意为“一次’; 还可用作副词，意为”一旦，曾经；从前，完全”. 常用搭配：
all at once 突然， 同时
at once 立刻，马上
every once in a while 偶然
for this once 就这一次，破例一回
more than once 不至一次
not once 一次也不
once again再次
once and again 一再，再三
once for all 一劳永逸；永久地，彻底地
once in a while 有时，间或，偶尔
【过关练习2】
1) _____ you have made a promise, you should carry it out
A. Once B. Until C. For D. While
2) The research is so designed that once ____ nothing canbe done to change it.
A. begins B. having begun
C. beginning D. begun
3) ______ you begin, you must continue.
A. Once B. until C. For D. As soon as
篇17：高一数学必修1教案教学反思
1、自我经历
在教学中，我们常常把自己学习数学的经历作为选择教学方法的一个重要参照，我们每一个人都做过学生，我们每一个人都学过数学，在学习过程中所品尝过的喜怒哀乐，紧张、痛苦和欢乐的经历对我们今天的学生仍有一定的启迪。
当然，我们已有的数学学习经历还不够给自己提供更多、更有价值、可用作反思的素材，那么我们可以“重新做一次学生”以学习者的身份从事一些探索性的活动，并有意识的对活动过程的有关行为做出反思。
2、学生角度
教学行为的本质在于使学生受益，教得好是为了促进学得好。
在新课程实验中，学习分段函数时，让学生去了解出租汽车的出租费用、或家长工资中的扣税标准，并写出调查报告。
在讲习题时，当我们向学生介绍一些精巧奇妙的解法时，特别是一些奇思妙解时，学生表面上听懂了，但当他自己解题时却茫然失措。
我们教师在备课时把要讲的问题设计的十分精巧，连板书都设计好了，表面上看天衣无缝，其实，任何人都会遭遇失败，教师把自己思维过程中失败的部分隐瞒了，最有意义，最有启发的东西抽掉了，学生除了赞叹我们教师的高超的解题能力以外，又有什么收获呢?所以贝尔纳说“构成我们学习上最大障碍的是已知的东西，而不是未知的东西”
大数学家希尔伯特的老师富士在讲课时就常把自己置于困境中，并再现自己从中走出来的过程，让学生看到老师的真实思维过程是怎样的。人的能力只有在逆境中才能得到最好的锻炼。经常去问问学生，对数学学习的感受，借助学生的眼睛看一看自己的教学行为，是促进教学的必要手段。
3、与同事交流
同事之间长期相处，彼此之间形成了可以讨论教学问题的共同语言、沟通方式和宽松氛围，便于展开有意义的讨论。
由于所处的教学环境相似、所面对的教学对象知识和能力水平相近，因此容易找到共同关注的教学问题展开对彼此都有成效的交流。
交流的方式很多，比如：共同设计教学活动、相互听课、做课后分析等等。交流的话题包括：
我觉得这堂课的地方是……，我觉得这堂课糟糕的地方是……;
这个地方的处理不知道怎么样?如果是你会怎么处理?
我本想在这里“放一放”学生，但怕收不回来，你觉得该怎么做?
我最怕遇到这种“意外”情况，但今天感觉处理得还可以，你觉得怎样?
合作解决问题——共同从事教学设计，从设计的依据、出发点，到教学重心、基本教学过程，甚至富有创意的素材或问题。更为重要的是这样的设计要为其后的教学反思留下空间。
4、参考资料
学习相关的数学教育理论，我们能够对许多实践中感到疑惑的现象做出解释;能够对存在与现象背后的问题有比较清楚的认识;能够更加理智的看待自己和他人教学经验;能够更大限度的做出有效的教学决策。
阅读数学教学理论可以开阔我们教学反思行为的思路，不在总是局限在经验的小天地，我们能够看到自己的教学实践行为有哪些与特定的教学情境有关、哪些更带有普遍的意义，从而对这些行为有较为客观的评价。能够使我们更加理性的从事教学反思活动并对反思得到的结论更加有信心。
更为重要的是，阅读教学理论，可以使我们理智的看待自己教学活动中“熟悉的”、“习惯性”的行为，能够从更深刻的层面反思题目进而使自己的专业发展走上良性发展的轨道。
篇18：高一数学必修1教案教学反思
一、强调教法、学法、教学内容以及教学媒介的有机整合。教学设计的难点在于教师把学术形态的知识转化为适合学生探究的认知形态的知识。学生的认知结构具有个性化特点，教学内容具有普遍性要求。如何在一节课中把二者较好地结合起来，是提高课堂教学效率的关键。
二、质疑反思的培养
通过现状调查，看出在目前的数学教学中缺乏有目的、有意识，具有针对性的培养学生对问题的质疑与解决问题、认识问题后的反思。学生的质疑反思能力是可以培养的，要有目的设计、训练。因此要培养质疑反思能力必须做到：(1)明确教学目标。要使学生由“学会”转化为“学会——会学——创新”。(2)在教学过程中要形成学生主动参与、积极探索、自觉建构的教学过程。(3)改善教学环境。(4)优化教学方法。
三、反思教育教学是否让不同的学生得到了不同的发展
应该怎样对学生进行教学，教师会说要因材施教。可实际教学中，又用一样的标准去衡量每一位学生，要求每一位学生都应该掌握哪些知识，要求每一位学生完成同样难度的作业等等。每一位学生固有的素质，学习态度，学习能力都不一样，对学习有余力的学生要帮助他们向更高层次迈进。平时布置作业时，让优生做完书上的习题后，再加上两三道有难度的题目，让学生多多思考，提高思含量。对于学习有困难的学生，则要降低学习要求，努力达到基本要求。布置作业时，让学困生，尽量完成书上的习题，课后习题不在家做，对于书上个别特别难的题目可以不做练习。
篇19：高一数学必修1教案教学反思
对一名数学教师而言教学反思可以从以下几个方面展开：对数学概念的反思、对学数学的反思、对教数学的反思。
1、对数学概念的反思——学会数学的思考
对于学生来说，学习数学的一个重要目的是要学会数学的思考，用数学的眼光去看世界。而对于教师来说，他还要从“教”的角度去看数学，他不仅要能“做”，还应当能够教会别人去“做”，因此教师对教学概念的反思应当从逻辑的、历史的、关系的等方面去展开。
以函数为例：
从逻辑的角度看，函数概念包含定义域、值域、对应法则等，以及单调性、奇偶性、周期性、对称性等性质和一些具体的函数，这些内容是函数教学的基础，但不是全部。
从关系的角度来看，不仅函数的主要内容之间存在着种.种实质性的联系，函数与其他中学数学内容也有着密切的联系。
方程的根可以作为函数的图象与轴交点的横坐标;
不等式的解就是函数的图象在轴上方的那一部分所对应的横坐标的集合;
数列也就是定义在自然数集合上的函数;
……
同样的几何内容也与函数有着密切的联系。
……
2、对学数学的反思
当学生走进数学课堂时，他们的头脑并不是一张白纸——对数学有着自己的认识和感受。教师不能把他们看着“空的容器”，按照自己的意思往这些“空的容器”里“灌输数学”这样常常会进入误区，因为师生之间在数学知识、数学活动经验、兴趣爱好、社会生活阅历等方面存在很大的差异，这些差异使得他们对同一个教学活动的感觉通常是不一样的。
要想多“制造”一些供课后反思的数学学习素材，一个比较有效的方式就是在教学过程中尽可能多的把学生头脑中问题“挤”出来，使他们解决问题的思维过程暴露出来。
3、对教数学的反思
教得好本质上是为了促进学得好。但在实际教学过程中是否能够合乎我们的意愿呢?
我们在上课、评卷、答疑解难时，我们自以为讲清楚明白了，学生受到了一定的启发，但反思后发现，自己的讲解并没有很好的针对学生原有的知识水平，从根本上解决学生存在的问题，只是一味的想要他们按照某个固定的程序去解决某一类问题，学生当时也许明白了，但并没有理解问题的本质性的东西。
★ 高二英语教学计划
★ 高中英语教学计划
【高一必修1（模块1）句型必背(新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)（精选19篇）】相关文章：
高二上学期文科数学教学计划2023-06-15
高二英语上册教学计划2022-07-21
高二上学期语文教学计划2023-06-17
新课程英语的教学反思2023-03-24
高二英语教学工作计划20222023-07-12
高二英语教学计划2022-12-29
高二上政治教学计划2022-12-19
高中英语教师教学工作计划2024-05-07
高二学期英语教学计划2023-03-12
高中英语教学计划的2023-11-11